Samsung | DVD-C450 | Samsung DVD-C350 User guide

DVD-C450K
DVD-C450
DVD-C360
DVD-C350K
DVD-C350
DVD Player
User Manual
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register your product at
www.samsung.com/global/register
AK68-01924A
ENGLISH
precautions
1. Setting up
- Refer to the identification label located on
the rear of your player for its proper operating voltage.
- Install your player in a cabinet with adequate ventilation holes. (7~10cm) Do not
block ventilation holes on any of the components for air circulation.
- Do not push the disc tray in by hand.
- Do not stack components.
- Be sure to turn all components off before
moving the player.
- Before connecting other components to this
player, be sure to turn them off.
- Be sure to remove the disc and turn off the
player after use, especially if you are not
going to use it for a long time.
- The mains plug is used as a disconnect
device and shall stay readily operable at
any time.
2. For your safety
- This product utilizes a laser. Use of controls
or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
- Do not open covers and do not repair yourself. Refer servicing to qualified personal.
3. Caution
- Your player is not intended for industrial
use but for domestic purposes. Use of this
product is for personal use only.
- Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects filled with
liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on
the apparatus.
- Exterior influences such as lightning and
static electricity can affect normal operation
of this player. If this occurs, turn the player
off and on again with the POWER button,
or disconnect and then reconnect the AC
power cord to the AC power outlet. The
player will operate normally.
- When condensation forms inside the player
due to sharp changes in temperature, the
2
Contents
player may not operate correctly. If this
occurs, leave the player at room temperature until the inside of the player becomes
dry and operational.
4. Disc
- Do not use record-cleaning sprays, benzene, thinner, or other volatile solvents that
may cause damage to the disc surface.
- Do not touch the disc’s signal surface. Hold
by the edges or by one edge and the hole
in the center.
- Wipe the dirt away gently; never wipe a
cloth back and forth over the disc.
5. Environmental info
- The battery used in this product contains chemicals that are harmful to the environment.
- So, dispose of batteries in the proper man
ner, according to federal, state, and local
regulations.
The product unit accompanying this user manual
is licensed under certain intellectual property
rights of certain third parties. This license is limited to private non-commercial use by end-user
consumers for licensed contents. No rights are
granted for commercial use. The license does
not cover any product unit other than this product unit and the license does not extend to any
unlicensed product unit or process conforming
to ISO/OUR 11172-3 or ISO/OUR 13818-3 used
or sold in combination with this product unit. The
license only covers the use of this product unit to
encode and/or decode audio files conforming to
the ISO/OUR 11172-3 or ISO/OUR 13818-3. No
rights are granted under this license for product
features or functions that do not conform to the
ISO/OUR 11172-3 or ISO/OUR 13818-3.
CAUTION: USE OF ANY CONTROLS,
ADJUSTMENTS, OR PROCEDURES OTHER
THAN SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Setup
General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Tour of the Remote Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Connections
Choosing a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Basic Functions
Playing a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Using the Search and Skip Functions . . . . . . . 6
Using the Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Using the Disc Menu and Title Menu . . . . . . . 6
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Slow Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Advanced Functions
Adjusting the Aspect Ratio (EZ View). . . . . . . . 7
Selecting the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Selecting the Subtitle Language. . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Changing the Camera Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Using the Bookmark Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Using the Zoom Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Clips Menu for MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4
CD Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Folder Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MP3/WMA/CD Audio Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MPEG4 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Playing media files Using the USB Host
Feature (Only DVD-C360,C450,C450K) . . . . . . 9
CD Ripping (Only DVD-C360,C450,C450K) . 10
Picture CD Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Karaoke Function
Karaoke Function (Only DVD-C450K,C350K).10
Changing Setup Menu
Using the Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the Language Features. . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the Audio Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the Parental Control . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the Divx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Reference
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
setup
General Features
Excellent Sound
Dolby Digital, a technology developed by Dolby
Laboratories, provides crystal clear sound reproduction.
Screen
Both regular and widescreen(16:9) pictures can
be viewed.
Slow Motion
An important scene can be viewed in slow
motion.
Parental Control (DVD)
The parental control allows users to set the level
necessary to prohibit children from viewing harmful movies such as those with violence, adult
subject matter, etc.
Various On-Screen Menu
Functions
You can select various languages (Audio/Subtitle)
and screen angles while enjoying movies.
Progressive Scan
Progressive scanning creates an improved picture
with double the scan lines of a conventional interlaced picture.
EZ VIEW (DVD)
Easy View enables picture adjustment to match
your TV's screen size (16:9 or 4:3).
Digital Photo Viewer (JPEG)
You can view Digital Photos on your TV.
Repeat
You can repeat a song or movie simply by pressing the REPEAT button.
MP3/WMA
This unit can play discs created from MP3/WMA
files.
MPEG4
This unit can play MPEG4 formats within an avi
file.
CD Ripping
(Only DVD-C450K,C450,C360)
This feature lets you copy audio files from discs
to USB device into MP3 format. (only audio CD
(CD DA)
Note
- Discs which cannot be played with this player.
• DVD-ROM
• DVD-RAM
• CD-ROM
• CDV
• CDI
• CVD
• CDGs play audio only, not graphics.
- Ability to play back may depend on
recording conditions.
• DVD-R, +R
• CD-RW
• DVD+RW, -RW (V mode)
- The unit may not play certain CD-R, CD-RW and DVD-R due to the disc type or record
ing conditions.
COPY PROTECTION
Many DVD discs are encoded with copy protection. Because of this, you should only connect your DVD player directly to your TV, not to
a VCR. Connecting to a VCR results in a distorted picture from copy-protected DVD discs.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by methods
claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Rovi
Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology must
be auzthorized by Rovi Corporation, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing
uses only unless otherwise authorized by Rovi
Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
PROGRESSIVE SCAN OUTPUTS
(576p)
“CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT
ALL HIGH DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE
FULLY COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND
MAY CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN
THE PICTURE, IN CASE OF 576 PROGRESSIVE
SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS
RECOMMENDED THAT THE USER SWITCH THE
CONNECTION TO THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’
OUTPUT. IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS
REGARDING YOUR TV SET COMPATIBILITY
WITH THIS MODEL 576p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE
CONTACT SAMSUNG'S CUSTOMER SERVICE
CENTER.”
Descriptions
Front Panel Controls
DVD-C450K
▼
▼
DVD-C450
PAL
2
▼
▼
DVD-C360
DIGITAL
SOUND
1
2
▼
▼
2
▼
▼
3
4
▼
▼
3
▼
6
7
▼
▼
▼
4
5
6
7
▼
▼
▼
▼
5
3
5
6
7
▼
▼
▼
▼
Region Number
Play Region Number
PAL broadcast system in U.K,
France, Germany, etc.
Dolby Digital disc
STEREO
STEREO
▼
▼
1
Disc Markings
~
9
8
1
Stereo disc
Digital Audio disc
DTS disc
Both the DVD player and the discs are coded
by region. These regional codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the codes do not
match, the disc will not play.
DVD-C350K
The Region Number for this player is described
on the rear panel of the player.
1
8
2
3
5
6
▼
▼
▼
▼
▼
▼
3
5
6
▼
▼
▼
DivX Certification
DivX, DivX Certified,
and associated logos
are trademarks of
DivXNetworks, Inc and
are used under license. DivX Certified to play
DivX video.
DVD-C350
1
2
▼
▼
MP3 disc
3
1. DISC TRAY
7. USB HOST
(Only DVD-C360, C450,C450K)
Connect digital still camera, MP3 player, memory
stick, Card reader, or another removable storage
devices.
Place the disc here.
2. DISPLAY
Operation indicators are displayed here.
3. OPEN/CLOSE/STOP (
)
Press to open and close the disc tray
8. MIC 1/2
1
11
2
3
12
13
(Only DVD-C350K,C450K)
(Only DVD-C450K,C450)
Connect Microphone for karaoke functions.
Stop disc play.
9. MICROPHONE VOLUME
4. STOP (■)
5. PLAY/PAUSE ( )
Play or pause the disc / Stops Disc Play
6. POWER ON/OFF ( )
Turn On/Off the DVD Player
(Only DVD-C450K)
Use to adjust microphone volume level. Use the
button by pressing it. Turn it to the left or right to
control the volume.
Tour of the Remote Control
DVD-C450K
DVD-C450
DVD-C360
1
2
12
3
4
5
6
7
14
15
8
9
10
11
4
13
16
17
18
19
20
21
DVD-C350K
DVD-C350
1. DVD POWER Button
Turns the power on or off.
2. REPEAT Button
Allows you to repeat play
a title,
chapter, track, or disc.
3. DISC MENU Button
Brings up the Disc menu.
4. BOOKMARK
Quickly find bookmark sections of a DVD.
5. SEARCH Buttons ( / )
Allow you to search forward/
back ward through a disc.
6. STOP Button ( )
7. SKIP Buttons ( / )
Use to skip the title, chapter
or track
8. MENU Button
Brings up the DVD player’s
menu.
9. ENTER /π/†,√/® Buttons
This button functions as a
toggle switch.
10. AUDIO Button (√)
Use this button to access
various audio functions on
a disc.
11. INFO Button
Displays the current disc
mode.
12. OPEN/CLOSE ( ) Button
To open and close the disc
tray.
13. REPEAT A-B Button
Allows you to repeat A-B
disc.
14. USB Button
15. VIDEO SEL. Button
Selects video output formats.
16. PLAY/PAUSE Button ( )
Begin/Pause disc play.
17. SUBTITLE Button (π)
18. RETURN Button
Returns to a previous menu.
19. TITLE MENU Button (®)
Brings up the Title menu.
20. KARAOKE Button († )
(Only DVD-C450K)
Use to begin Karaoke functions.
21. CANCEL Button
Use to remove menus or
status displays from the
screen.
4
14
15
5
16
6
7
17
18
8
9
10
19
20
21
1. DVD POWER Button
Turns the power on or off.
2. REPEAT Button
Allows you to repeat play a
title, chapter, track, or disc.
3. DISC MENU Button
Brings up the Disc menu.
4. BOOKMARK
Quickly find bookmark sections
of a DVD.
5. STOP Button ( )
6. SKIP Buttons ( / )
Use to skip the title, chapter
or track
7. MENU Button
Brings up the DVD player’s
menu.
8. ENTER/π/†,√/® Buttons
This button functions as a
toggle switch.
9. AUDIO Button (√)
Use this button to access various audio functions on a disc.
10. INFO Button
Displays the current disc
mode.
11. OPEN/CLOSE ( ) Button
To open and close the disc
tray.
12. REPEAT A-B Button
Allows you to repeat A-B
disc.
13. ZOOM Button
Enlarges the DVD Picture.
14. VIDEO SEL. Button
Selects video output for
mats.
15. SEARCH Buttons ( / )
Allow you to search forward/
back ward through a disc.
16. PLAY/PAUSE Button ( )
Begin/Pause disc play.
17. SUBTITLE Button (π)
18. RETURN Button
Returns to a previous menu.
19. TITLE MENU Button (®)
Brings up the Title menu.
20. CANCEL Button
Use to remove menus
or status displays from the
screen.
21. KARAOKE Button (†)
(Only DVD-C350K)
Use to begin Karaoke func
tions.
connections
- Press the input selector on your TV remote control until the Component signal from the DVD
player appears on the TV screen.
- Set the Video Output to I-SCAN/P-SCAN in the Display Setup menu. You can use the VIDEO
SEL. button to change the Video Output mode.
Choosing a Connection
The following shows examples of connections commonly used to connect the DVD player with a TV
and other components.
Before Connecting the DVD Player
- Always turn off the DVD player, TV, and other components before you connect or disconnect any
cables.
- Refer to the user’s manual of the additional components you are connecting for more information on those particular components.
Note
- What is "Progressive Scan"? Progressive scan has twice as many scanning lines as the interlace
output method has. Progressive scanning method can provide better and clearer picture quality.
A. Connecting to a TV (VIDEO)
- Using video/audio cables, connect the VIDEO (yellow)/AUDIO (red and white) OUT terminals
on the rear of the DVD player to the VIDEO (yellow)/AUDIO (red and white) IN terminals of TV.
- Turn on the DVD player and TV.
- Press the input selector on your TV remote control until the Video signal from the DVD player
appears on the TV screen.
COAXIAL CABLE
BLUE
B
2-Channel stereo ampilfier,
Dolby digital or
DTS amplifier
WHITE
B. Connection to an Audio System (2 Channel Amplifier, Dolby Digital,MPEG2 or DTS Amplifier)
RED
RED
RED
YELLOW
VIDEO CABLE
AUDIO CABLE
RED
WHITE
WHITE
AUDIO CABLE
GREEN
WHITE
Note
- Noise may be generated if the audio cable is placed too close to the power cable.
- If you want to connect to an Amplifier, please refer to the Amplifier connection section below.
- The number and position of terminals can vary depending on your TV set. Please refer to the user's manual of the TV.
- If there is one audio input terminal on the TV, connect it to the [AUDIO OUT][left] (white) terminal
of the DVD player.
- If you press the VIDEO SEL. button when DVD Player is in stop mode or no disc is inserted, the
Video Output mode changes in the following sequence: (I-SCAN ➝ P-SCAN ).
RED
A
C
COMPONENT CABLE
YELLOW
RED BLUE GREEN
- Using the audio cables, connect the AUDIO (red and white) OUT terminals on the rear of the
DVD player to the AUDIO (red and white) IN terminals of the Amplifier. If using a coaxial cable,
connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) terminal on the rear of the DVD player to the
DIGITAL AUDIO IN (COAXIAL) terminal of the Amplifier.
- Using the video signal cable(s), connect the VIDEO or COMPONENT terminals on the rear of the
DVD player to the VIDEO or COMPONENT terminals of your TV.
- Turn on the DVD player, TV, and Amplifier.
- Press the input select button of the Amplifier to select external input in order to hear sound
from the DVD player.
Refer to your Amplifier's user manual to set the Amplifier's audio input.
C. Connections to a TV Interlace / Progressive
- Using Component video cables (not included), connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (PR, PB
and Y) jacks on the rear of the DVD player to the COMPONENT IN (PR, PB and Y) jacks of your
TV.
- Using the audio cables, connect the AUDIO (red and white) OUT terminals on the rear of the
DVD player to the AUDIO (red and white) IN terminals of TV. Turn on the DVD player and TV.
- Set the Video Output to I-SCAN/P-SCAN in the Display Setup menu. You can use the VIDEO
SEL. button to change the Video Output mode.
5
basic functions
To access the desired title when there is more than one in the disc. For example, if there is
more than one movie on a DVD, each movie will be identified.
Playing a Disc
Most DVD discs are recorded in chapters so that you can quickly find a specific passage.
Before Play
- Turn on your TV and set it to the correct Video Input by pressing TV/VIDEO button on the TV
remote control.
- If you connected an external Audio System, turn on your Audio System and set it to the correct
Audio Input.
After plugging in the player, the first time you press the DVD POWER button, this screen comes
up: If you want to select a language, press a π/† button then press ENTER (This screen will only
appear when you plug in the player for the first time.) If the language for the startup screen is not
set, the settings may change whenever you turn the power on or off. Therefore, make sure that
you select the language you want to use. Once you select a menu language, you can change it by
pressing the ■ /
button on the front panel of the unit for more than 5 seconds with no disc in
the unit. Then the SELECT MENU LANGUAGE window appears again where you can reset your
preferred language.
Using the Search and Skip Functions
During play, you can search quickly through a chapter or track, and use the skip function to jump to
the next selection.
Searching through a Chapter or Track
During play, press the SEARCH (
or
) button on the remote control for more than 1 second.
DVD
2X, 4X, 64X, 128X
VCD
4X, 8X
CD
2X, 4X, 8X
Note
- The speed marked in this function may be different from the actual playback speed.
- No sound is heard during search mode (Except CD).
Skipping Tracks
During play, press the SKIP (
or
) button.
- When playing a DVD, if you press the SKIP ( ) button, it moves to the next chapter. If you
press the SKIP ( ) button, it moves to the beginning of the chapter. One more press makes it
move to the beginning of the previous chapter.
- When playing a VCD or a CD, if you press the SKIP ( ) button, it moves to the next track. If
you press the SKIP ( ) button, it moves to the beginning of the track. One more press makes it
move to the beginning of the previous track.
- If a track exceeds 15 minutes when playing a VCD and you press the
button, it moves forward 5 minutes. If you press the
button, it moves backward 5 minutes.
Using the Display Function
When Playing a DVD/VCD/MPEG4
1. During play, press the INFO button on the remote control.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item.
- When playing VCD, the Disc Menu may notwork.
3. Press the √/® buttons to make the desired setup and then press the ENTER button.
4. To make the screen disappear, press the INFO button.
6
Allows playback of the film from a desired time. You must enter the starting time as a reference.
The time search function does not operate on some disc.
Refers to the subtitle languages available in the disc. You will be able to choose the subtitle
languages or, if you prefer, turn them off from the screen. A DVD disc can have up to 32 different
subtitles.
Enter and press the √/® buttons to access the desired Audio, Angle, Bookmark, EZ View
function and Zoom.
Refers to the language of the film soundtrack. In the example, the soundtrack is played in
English 5.1CH. A DVD disc can have up to eight different soundtracks. Some DVD discs are
have more angle function from any picture.
Bookmark function make you easily and quickly to find a track or chapter from DVD or CD.
The EZ View function is use for changing the aspect ratio in DVD.
The ZOOM function is use for Enlarge DVD Picture
Using the Disc and Title Menu
During stop mode of a DVD disc, press the DISC MENU/TITLE MENU button on the remote control.
Note
- The Disc Menu or Title Menu may not work. Depending on the disc.
- You can also use the Disc Menu, using the DISC MENU button on the remote control.
- Title Menu will only be displayed if there are at least two titles in the disc.
Repeat Play
Repeat the current track, chapter, title, a chosen section (A-B), or all of the disc.
When playing a DVD/VCD
Press the REPEAT buttons to select Chapter, Title, Track, Disc or Repeat : Off
- DVD repeats play by chapter or title, VCD repeat play by disc or track.
- Chapter : repeats the chapter that is playing.
- Title : repeats the title that is playing.
- Disc : repeats the disc that is playing.
- Repeat : Off
- Track : repeats the track that is playing.
Using the A-B Repeat function
1. Press the REPEAT A-B button at the point where you want repeat play to start (A).
2. Press the REPEAT A-B button at the point where you want the repeat play to stop (B).
- To return to normal play, press the CANCEL button.
3. To return to normal play, press the REPEAT A-B then press the ENTER button until the display shows Repeat : Off
Note
- A-B REPEAT allow you to set point (B) directly after point (A) has been set.
- Depending on the disc, the Repeat function may not work.
- When playing VCD, the Disc Menu may not work.
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Slow Play
This feature allows you to repeat scenes slowly containing sports, dancing, musical instruments
being played etc., so you can study them more closely.
When playing a DVD/VCD
1. During play, press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button.
2. Press the SEARCH ( ) button to choose the play speed between 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 and 1/16 of
normal during PAUSE.
advanced functions
Adjusting the Aspect Ratio (EZ View)
To play back using aspect ratio (DVD)
1. During play, press the INFO button on the remote control.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select Shortcut, then press the ENTER button.
3. Press the √/® buttons to select EZ View, then press the ENTER button.
- Each time you press the √/® button, the screen size changes. For graphics of the screen sizes
and the sequence in which the sizes change, see the next column.
If you are using a 16:9 TV
For 16:9 aspect ratio discs
- NORMAL WIDE
- SCREEN FIT
- ZOOM FIT
- VERTICAL FIT
If you are using a 4:3 TV
For 16:9 aspect ratio discs
- 4:3 Letter Box
- 4:3 Pan Scan
- SCREEN FIT
- ZOOM FIT
For 4:3 aspect ratio discs
- NORMAL SCREEN
- SCREEN FIT
- ZOOM FIT
For 4:3 aspect ratio discs
- NORMAL SCREEN
- SCREEN FIT
- ZOOM FIT
Note
This function may behave differently depending on the type of disc.
Selecting the Audio Language
You can select a desired audio language quickly and easily with the AUDIO button.
Using the AUDIO/ √ button (DVD/VCD/MPEG4)
1. Press the AUDIO/√ button. The Audio changes when the button is pressed repeatedly. The
audio languages are represented by abbreviations.
Press Audio /√ button at remocon repeatedly to select the desired Audio on MPEG4 then press the
ENTER.
Note
- This function depends on audio languages are encoded on the disc and may not work.
- A DVD disc can contain up to 8 audio languages.
You can select a desired subtitle quickly and easily with the SUBTITLE (π) button.
Using the SUBTITLE / π button (DVD/MPEG4)
1. Press the SUBTITLE / π button. The subtitle languages are represented by abbreviations. The
subtitle changes when the button is pressed repeatedly.
Press SUBTITLE / π button at remocon repeatedly to select the desired subtitle language on a
MPEG4 then press the ENTER.
2. To remove the SUBTITLE icon, press the SUBTITLE / π button.
Note
- You have to change the desired subtitle in the Disc Menu, according to discs. Press the DISC
MENU button.
- This function depends on what subtitles are encoded on the disc and may not work on all DVDs.
- A DVD disc can contain up to 32 subtitle languages.
Changing the Camera Angle
When a DVD contains multiple angles of a particular scene, you can use the ANGLE function.
Using the ANGLE button (DVD)
If the disc contains multiple angles, the ANGLE appears on the screen.
1. During play, press the INFO button on the remote control.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select Shortcut. then press the ENTER button.
3. Press the √/® buttons to select Angle, then press the ENTER button.
4. Press the √/® buttons on the remote control to select the desired angle.
Note
- If the disc has only one angle, this feature won’t work. Currently, very few discs have this
feature.
- Depending on the disc, these functions may not work.
Using the Bookmark Function
This feature lets you bookmark sections of a DVD or VCD (Menu Off mode) so you can quickly find
them at a later time.
Using the Bookmark Function DVD/VCD
1. During play, press the INFO button on the remote control.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select Shortcut, then press the ENTER button
3. Press the √/® buttons to select Bookmark then press the ENTER button.
4. When you reach the scene you want to mark, press‑the ENTER button. You can bookmark up to
12 scenes at a time.
Note
- Depending on a disc, the Bookmark function may not work.
- When playing VCD, the Disc Menu may not work.
7
Recalling a Marked Scene
CD-R MP3/WMA file
1~3. The first 1~3 steps are the same as those for “Using the Bookmark Function”.
4.
Press the √/® buttons to select a marked scene.
5.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE ( ) button to skip to the marked scene.
When you record MP3 or WMA files on CD-R, please refer to the following.
- Your MP3 or WMA files should be ISO 9660 or JOLIET format.
ISO 9660 format and Joliet MP3 or WMA files are compatible with Microsoft's DOS and
Windows, and with Apple's Mac.This format is the most widely used.
- When naming your MP3 or WMA files, do not exceed 8 characters, and enter “.mp3, .wma”
as the file extension.
General name format : Title.mp3. or Title.wma. When composing your title, make sure that you
use 8 characters or less, have no spaces in the name, and avoid the use of special characters
including: (.,/,\,=,+).
- Use a decompression transfer rate of at least 128 Kbps when recording MP3 files.
Sound quality with MP3 files basically depends on the rate of compression/ decompression you
choose. Getting CD audio sound requires an analog/digital sampling rate, that is conversion
to MP3 format, of at least 128 Kbps and up to 160 Kbps. However, choosing higher rates, like
Kbps or more, only rarely give better sound quality. Conversely, files with decompression rates
below 128 Kbps will not be played properly.
- Use a decompression transfer rate of at least 64Kbps when recording WMA files.
Sound quality with WMA files basically depends on the rate of compression/decompression you
choose. Getting CD audio sound requires an analog/digital sampling rate, that is conversion to
WMA format, of at least 64Kbps and up to Kbps. Conversely, files with decompression rates
below 64Kbps or over Kbps will not be played properly.
- Do not try recording copyright protected MP3 files.
Certain "secured" files are encrypted and code protected to prevent illegal copying. These files
are of the following types: Windows Media (registered trade mark of Microsoft Inc) and SDMITM
(registered trade mark of The SDMI Foundation). You cannot copy such files.
- Important:
The above recommendations cannot be taken as a guarantee that the DVD player will play MP3
recordings, or as an assurance of sound quality. You should note that certain technologies and
methods for MP3 file recording on CD-Rs prevent optimal playback of these files on your DVD
player (degraded sound quality and in some cases, inability of the player to read the files).
- This unit can play a maximum of 500 files and 500 folders per disc.
Clearing a Bookmark
1~3. The first 1~3 steps are the same as those for “Using the Bookmark Function”.
4.
Press the √/® buttons to select the bookmark number you want to delete.
5. Press the CANCEL button to delete a bookmark number.
Using the Zoom Function
- Using the Zoom Function (DVD/VCD) (DVD-C350,C350K)
1. During play, press the ZOOM button on the remote control.
- Using the Zoom Function (DVD/VCD) (DVD-C360,C450,C450K)
1. During play, press the INFO button on the remote control.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select Shortcut, then press the ENTER button
3. Press the √/® buttons to select Zoom, then press the ENTER button.
- During DVD/VCD play, press ENTER to zoom in 2X/3X/4X/ Normal in order.
Clips Menu for MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4/CD Audio
CD Audio or discs with MP3/WMA/JPEG contain individual songs and/or pictures that can be organized into folders as shown below. They are similar to how you use
your computer to put files into different folders.
001/004
Open the disc tray. Place the disc on the tray. Close the tray. and the
tray closes.
Folder Selections
The folder can be selected in Stop or Play mode.
- To select the Parent Folder
Press the RETURN button to go to parent folder, or press the π/† buttons to select “..” and
press ENTER to go to the parent folder.
MP3/WMA/CD Audio Playback
1. Open the disc tray. Place the disc on the tray. Close the tray.
- Only one kind of file is played back when a disc or a folder contains both MP3 and WMA files.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select a song file.
‑ Press ENTER to begin playback of the song file.
Repeat/Random playback
Press the REPEAT button to change the playback mode. There are four modes, such as Off, Track,
Folder and Random.
- Off: Normal Playback
- Track: Repeats the current song file.
- Folder: Repeats the song files which have the same extension in the current folder.
- Random: Song files which have the same extension will be played in random order.
To resume normal play, press the CANCEL button.
8
MPEG4 Playback
Playing Media File Using the USB Host feature
MPEG4 Play Function
MPEG4 is a compressed video format designed to deliver DVD quality video at lower data rates
and smaller file sizes. Types of MPEG4 files are DivX or Xvid. These files have an .avi extension. AVI
files are used to contain the audio and video data. This unit can only play AVI format files with the
“.avi” extension.
1. Open the disc tray. Place the disc on the tray. Close the tray.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select an avi file (DivX/XviD) and then press ENTER button.
Repeat playback
Press the REPEAT button to change playback mode. There are 3 modes, such as Track, Folder and Off.
- Track : repeats the track that is playing.
- Folder : repeats the AVI files which have the same extension in the current folder.
- Off
MPEG4 Function Description
Function
(
Skip
or
)
Search
(
or
)
Slow motion
Play
Description
During play, press the
utes.
or
(Only DVD-C360, C450,C450K)
You can enjoy the media files such as pictures, movies and tunes saved in an MP3 player, USB
memory or digital camera in high audio by connecting the storage device to the USB port of the
DVD Player.
Using the USB HOST feature
1. Connect the USB device to the USB port on the front of the unit.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select a file in USB. Press ENTER to Open file.
Note
• Each time the USB button on the remote control is pressed, a frame of the USB device
selection will appear.
• “USB” appears on the display screen.
• When playing DVD or CD and USB inserted, “Press USB to select device” appear at the top
left corner for a moment.
• USB MENU screen appears on the TV screen and the saved file is played.
button, it moves forward or backward 5 min-
During play, press the SEARCH ( or
) button and press again to search at
a faster speed. Allows you to search at a faster speed in an AVI file. (2X, 4X, 8X)
Allows you to search at a slower speed in an AVI file. (1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16)
- These functions may not work depending on MPEG4 file.
CD-R AVI file
This unit can play the following video compression formats within the AVI file format:
- DivX 3.11 contents
- DivX 4 contents (Based on MPEG-4 Simple Profile)
- DivX 5 contents (MPEG-4 simple profile plus additional features such as bi-directional frames.
Qpel and GMC are also supported.)
- XviD MPEG-4 compliant Contents.
This unit supports all resolutions up to maximum below.
DivX5
720 x 480 @30fps
720 x 576 @25fps
: Maximum bit rate :4Mbps
Note
• Some MPEG-4 files created on a personal computer may not be play back. That is why Codec
Type, Version and Higher resolution over specification is not supported.
• This unit supports CD-R/RW written in MPEG4 in accordance with the “ISO9660 format”.
Skip Forward/Back
During playback, press the (
/
) button.
• When there is more than one file, when you press the
• When there is more than one file, when you press the
button, the next file is selected.
button, the previous file is selected.
Safe USB Removal
To prevent damage to the memory stored in the USB device, perform safe removal before
disconnecting the USB cable.
- Press the STOP ( ) button
- Remove the USB cable.
Fast playback
To play back the disc at a faster speed, press (
/
) during playback.
• Each time you press either button, the playback speed will change as follows:
2x ➞ 4x ➞ 8x.
Compatible Devices
1. U
SB devices that support USB Mass Storage v1.0. (USB devices that operate as a removable
disk in Windows (2000 or later) without additional driver installation.)
2. MP3 Player: Flash type MP3 player.
3. Digital camera: Cameras that support USB Mass Storage v1.0.
• Cameras that operate as a removable disk in Windows (2000 or later) without additional
driver installation.
4. USB Flash Drive: Devices that support USB2.0 or USB1.1.
•You may experience a difference in playback quality when you connect a USB1.1 device.
5. USB card Reader: One slot USB card reader and Multi slot USB card reader
•Depending on the manufacturer. the USB card reader may not be supported.
• If you install multiple memory devices into a multi card reader, you may experience problems.
6. If you use a USB extension cable, the USB device might not be recognized.
• CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.
• Digital Cameras that use PTP protocol or require additional program installation when connected
to a PC are not supported.
9
• A device using NTFS file system is not supported. (Only FAT 16/32 (File Allocation Table 16/32) file
system is supported.)
• Some MP3 players, when connected to this product,may not operate depending on the sector
size of their file system.
• The USB HOST function is not supported if a product that transfers media files by its
manufacturer-specific program is connected.
• Does not operate with Janus enabled MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) devices.
• The USB host function of this product does not support all USB devices.
CD Ripping (Only DVD-C360, C450, C450K)
This feature lets you to copy audio files from disc to USB device into MP3 format.
1. Open the dics tray. Place the Audio CD(CD DA) disc on the tray, and close the tray.
Connect the USB device to the USB port on the front of the unit.This screen will be displayed.
Press ENTER to select disc.
2. Press the RETURN button to display the ripping screen.
3. Press the π/† buttons, then press the ENTER button to select files for ripping.
- To deselect files, press ENTER button again.
4. Press the ® and † button to select START, then press the ENTER button begin ripping.
The ripping menu contain the following buttons :
- Mode : Fast/Normal
- Bit Rate, press ENTER to change 128kbps ➔ 192kbps ➔ 256kbps ➔ 320kbps.
- Device selection, press ENTER to change between deviced (max 4).
- Select - Unselect, Press ENTER to change from Select all or Select none.
- Start ripping, press ENTER to start ripping process.
Note
- To return to CDDA screen, press the RETURN button again.
- When the CD ripping is in process the player will automatically begin playing.
- Only Audio CD (CD DA) discs can be ripped.
- Because the speed is 2.6x of normal speed. User is unable to play the CD DA through the rip
ping process.
Picture CD Playback
1. Select the desired folder.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select a Picture file in the clips menu and then press the ENTER button.
Note
- Press the STOP button to return to the clips menu.
- When playing a Kodak Picture CD, the unit displays the Photo directly, not the clips menu.
Rotation
- Each time the √/® button is pressed, the picture rotates 90 degrees clockwise.
- Each time the π button is pressed, the picture rotates 180 degrees.
- Each time the † button is pressed, the picture changes to the mirror appearance.
Zoom
- Each time the ENTER Button is pressed repeteadly, the picture is enlarged. zoom mode : 100%,
125%, 150%, 200%.
10
Slide show
- When you press the ENTER/PLAY at JPEG file,it will go to full screen mode and automaically slide
show.
Note
- Depending on a file size, the amount of time between each picture may be different from the manual.
- If you don’t press any button, the slide show will start automatically in about 10 seconds by
default.
CD-R JPEG Disc
- Only files with the “.jpg” and “.JPG” extensions can be played.
- If the disc has not been closed during the recording phase,(ie has not been finalised) it will take
longer to start playing and not all of the recorded files may be played.
- Only CD-R discs with JPEG files in ISO 9660 or Joliet format can be played.
- The name of the JPEG file may not be longer than 8 characters and should contain no blank
spaces or special characters (. / = +).
- Only a consecutively written multi-se ssion disc can be played.If there is a blank segment in the
multi-session disc, the disc can be played only up to the blank segment.
- A maximum of 500 images can be stored on a single CD.
- Kodak Picture CDs are recommended.
- When playing a Kodak Picture CD, only the JPEG files in the pictures folder can be played.
- Kodak Picture CD: The JPEG files in the pictures folder can be played automatically.
- Konica Picture CD: If you want to see the Picture, select the JPEG files in the clips menu.
- Fuji Picture CD: If you want to see the Picture, select the JPEG files in the clips menu.
- QSS Picture CD: The unit may not play QSS Picture CD.
- If the number of files in 1 Disc is over 500, only 500 JPEG files can be played.
- If the number of folders in 1 Disc is over 500, only JPEG files in 500 folders can be played
karaoke functions
Karaoke Functions
Operation Sequence
(Only DVD-C450K, C350K)
1. Connect the Mixed Audio Out terminals with the TV or Amplifier.
2. Connect Mic into Mic jack. When a MIC is connected, the karaoke functions can be used.
Mic Volume and Key Control
1. Playback the Karaoke Disc containing the wanted songs.
- Press the KARAOKE button to select Mic Volume then press KARAOKE button again to select
keycon.
2. Press the √/® buttons to change the desired tone.
Note
- If you hear feedback (squealing or howling) while using the karaoke feature, move the microphone away from the speakers or turn down the microphone volume or the speaker volume.
- When playing MP3, WMA, DTS and LPCM disc, the karaoke functions will not operate.
- When the MIC is connected, Digital Out does not work.
- The MIC sound outputs only from Analog Audio Out.
changing setup menu
Using the Setup Menu
The Setup menu lets you customize your DVD player by allowing you to select various language
preferences, set up a parental level, even adjust the player to the type of television screen you
have.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button on the remote control.Use the √/® buttons
to select Setup, then press the † or ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to access the different features. Press the ® or ENTER button to
access the sub features.
3. To make the setup screen disappear after setting up, press the MENU button again.
Note
Depending on the disc, some Setup Menu selections may not work.
Setting Up the Language Features
If you set the player menu, disc menu, audio and subtitle language in advance, they will come up
automatically every time you watch a movie.
Using the Player Menu Language
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
2. Press the √/® buttons to select Language Setup Page, then press the † or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired language, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Note
- The language is selected and the screen returns to Language Setup menu.
- To make the setup menu disappear, press the MENU button.
- If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the original pre-recorded language is
selected.
- Select “Original” if you want the default soundrack language to be the original languange the
disc is recorded in.
- Select “Automatic” if you want the subtitle language to be the same as the language selected
as the audio language.
- Some discs may not contain the language you select : in that case the disc will use its original
languange setting.
Setting Up the Audio Options
Audio Options allows you to setup the audio device and sound status settings depending on the
audio system in use.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
2. Press the √/® buttons to select Audio Setup Page, then press the † or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Note : • Even when PCM Down sampling is Off
• Some discs will only output down sampled audio through the digital outputs.
• There is no analog audio output when you play a DTS sound disc. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems,
Inc.
Setting Up the Display Options
Display options enable you to set various video functions of the player.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
2. Press the √/® buttons to select Display Setup Page, then press the † or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button.
• Consult your TV User’s Manual to findout if your TV supports Progressive Scan. If
Progressive Scan is supported, follow the TV User’s Manual regarding Progressive Scan
settings in the TV’s menu system.
• If Video Output is set incorrectly, the screen may be blocked.
• When the resolution is changed during playback, it may take a few seconds for a normal
image to appear.
Setting Up the Parental Control
The Parental Control function works in conjunction with DVDs that have been assigned a rating,
which helps you control the types of DVDs that your family watches. There are up to 8 rating levels
on a disc.
Setting Up the Rating Level / Changing the Password
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
2. Press the √/® buttons to select Parental Page, then press the † or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select Parental/Password, then press the ® or ENTER button.
4. Press the π/† buttons to select Rating Level you want, then press the ENTER button.
e.g) Setting up in KID SAFE.
5. Enter your password. If this is the first time, enter 0000. Then, enter a new password. The new
password must be a number other than 0000 to activate the parental control function. Then, reenter the new password.
Note
ΠKID SAFE.
´ G (General Audiences) : All Ages Admited.
ˇ PG (Parental Guidance suggested) : Some material may not be suitable for young children.
¨ PG 13 (PG-13 Parents strongly cautioned) : Some material may be in appropriate for children
under 13.
ˆ PGR (Parental Guide Recommended) : These are not necessarily unsuitable for children, but
viewer discretion is advised, and parents and guardians are encouraged to supervise younger
viewer.
Ø R (Restricted) : Under 17 requires accompanying adult.
∏ NC17 (NC-17) : No one 17 and under admitted.
” ADULT.
- If you have forgotten your password, see “Forgot Password” in the Troubleshooting Guide.
11
Setting Up the DivX
Setting Up the DivX
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.
2. Press the √/® buttons to select DivX Page, then press the † or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Note : • Press Ok will make the registration code window disappear.
• DivX can only be accessed at stop mode.
reference
Troubleshooting
Before requesting service (troubleshooting), please check the following.
Problem
Action
The screen is
blocked
• Press the ■ / button (in front panel) for more than 5 seconds under no
disc inside. All settings will revert to the factory settings.
Forgot password.
•Press the ■ / button (on the panel) for more than 5 seconds under no
disc inside. All setings including the password will revert to the factory settings. Don’t use this unless absolutely necessary.
Specifications
Power Requirements
Weight
Power Comsumption
General
Dimensions
DVD-C350,C350K,C360 : 1.2 Kg
DVD-C450,C450K : 1.5 Kg
6W
DVD-C350,C350K,C360 :
360mm (W) X 207mm(D) X 42mm (H)
DVD-C450,C450K :
430mm (W) X 207mm(D) X 42mm (H)
Operating Temperature
Range
+5°C to +35°C
Operating Humidity Range
10 % to 75 %
Y : 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω load)
Pr : 0.70 Vp-p (75 Ω load)
Pb : 0.70 Vp-p (75 Ω load)
Video
Output
Component Video
Audio
Output
Maximum Output Level
2Vrms
Frequency Response
20Hz ~ 20kHz
Output Terminal
12
AC 110-240 V ~ 50/60 Hz
RCA
memo
memo
memo
Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care center.
Region
North America
Latin America
Europe
CIS
Asia Pacific
Area
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421, 4004-0000
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
00-1800-5077267
800-7919267
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0-800-100-5303
01-8000112112
Belgium
02 201 2418
Czech Republic
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Hungary
Italia
Luxemburg
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
Slovakia
Spain
Sweden
U.K
Eire
Austria
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786)
8-SAMSUNG (7267864)
30-6227 515
01 4863 0000
01805-SAMSUNG (726-7864 € 0,14/Min)
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
02 261 03 710
0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/Min)
3-SAMSUNG (7267864)
0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678), 022-607-93-33
80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
902-1-SAMSUNG (902 172 678)
0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG)
0845 SAMSUNG (7267864)
0818 717 100
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min)
Switzerland
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min)
Russia
Kazakhstan
Uzbekistan
Kyrgyzstan
Tadjikistan
8-800-555-55-55
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
Ukraine
8-800-502-0000
Belarus
Moldova
Lithuania
Latvia
Estonia
Australia
New Zealand
China
810-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-800-77777
8000-7267
800-7267
1300 362 603
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786)
400-810-5858, 010-6475 1880
Hong Kong
3698-4698
India
Indonesia
Japan
Malaysia
3030 8282, 1800 110011, 1800 3000 8282
0800-112-8888
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1-800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-7864),
1-800-8-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 02-5805777
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1800-29-3232, 02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
444 77 11
0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864 )
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 8000-4726
Philippines
Middle East &
Africa
Contact Center 
Canada
Mexico
U.S.A
Argentine
Brazil
Chile
Nicaragua
Honduras
Costa Rica
Ecuador
El Salvador
Guatemala
Jamaica
Panama
Puerto Rico
Rep. Dominica
Trinidad & Tobago
Venezuela
Colombia
Singapore
Thailand
Taiwan
Vietnam
Turkey
South Africa
U.A.E
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com/mx
www.samsung.com/us
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com/br
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com.co
www.samsung.com/be (Dutch)
www.samsung.com/be_fr (French)
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com/fr
www.samsung.de
www.samsung.com/hu
www.samsung.com/it
www.samsung.com/lu
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com/es
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com/uk
www.samsung.com/ie
www.samsung.com/at
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com/ch_fr/ (French)
www.samsung.ru
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
www.samsung.ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru
www.samsung.com/lt
www.samsung.com/lv
www.samsung.com/ee
www.samsung.com/au
www.samsung.com/nz
www.samsung.com/cn
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/hk_en/
www.samsung.com/in
www.samsung.com/id
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com/sg
www.samsung.com/th
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com/vn
www.samsung.com/tr
www.samsung.com/za
www.samsung.com/ae
AK68-01924A
‫‪DVD-C450K‬‬
‫‪DVD-C450‬‬
‫‪DVD-C360‬‬
‫‪DVD-C350K‬‬
‫‪DVD-C350‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺸﻐﯿﻞ ﺩﻱﻓﻲﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺧﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺨﯿّﻞ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.‬ﺷﻜﺭ ﺍﻠﻛﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺮﺍﺀﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﻤﻨﺘﻭﺝ ﻠﺸﺭﻜﺔ ﺴﺎﻤﺴﻭﻨﺞ‬
‫ﻠﻼﺴﺘﻤﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺄﻔﺿﻞ ﺨﺪﻤﺔ‪,‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻳﻝ ﻤﻨﺘﻭﺟﺗﻙ ﻔﻲ‬
‫‪www.samsung.com/global/register‬‬
‫‪AK68-01924A‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻭﺻﻒ‬
576P
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻠﻠﻭﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‬
DVD-C450K
٩
٨
١
٤
٣
٢
¥„‚)f„‚1K…8|•G*Ž§I
¥„‚)f„‚1K…8|•G*Ž§I
٧
٦
٥
576P
▼
▼
▼
▼
▼
▼
▼
▼
▼
▼
▼
,|;f¡¼*m*4fŒ„G*m*3…8*|E&¸*¢HjªGfkG*Ž*§I&¸*œª„-™MaMÕ+¬{G* .…8*|E&*œ„Hª†k„€M
,|;f¡¼*m*4fŒ„G*m*3…8*|E&¸*¢HjªGfkG*Ž*§I&¸*œª„-™MaMÕ+¬{G* .…8*|E&*œ„Hª†k„€M
…‚)f„‚»*
١
٢
▼
▼
DVD-C360
DVD-C350K
١
٢
▼
▼
١
٢
٨
▼
▼
▼
٣
٤
٥
٦
▼
▼
▼
▼
٧
jª+|ŒG*
jª+|ŒG*
DVD-C450
▼
٣
٥
٦
٧
▼
▼
▼
▼
٥
٣
▼
▼
٦
▼
…‚)f„‚»*
m§„‚›Gj•)fD,2§/¨›<
. …8|E¬§ktM
f‰IK C@6L=;=G5@ jª¡•-œ„­’+§Maª’G*K
m§„‚›Gj•)fD,2§/¨›< .…8|E¬§ktM
%(
f‰IK C@6L=;=G5@ jª¡•-œ„­’+§Maª’G*K
j„7f„G*Km§„‚G*“)f;K¢HaMaŒG*aMa³¢˜Ê
%(
j„7f„G*jž)fEÑ1¢HjG§¤„€+
j„7f„G*Km§„‚G*“)f;K¢HaMaŒG*aMa³¢˜Ê
j„7f„G*jž)fEÑ1¢HjG§¤„€+
%(
m§„‚G*‡„9jª¡•k+~ªžkM§MaªD…8|E ˆ§„­¼*…8|•G*m§„8K . +,2§/K
%(
m§„‚G*‡„9jª¡•k+~ªžkM§MaªD…8|E ˆ§„­¼*…8|•G*m§„8K . +,2§/K
m*3jªžE4,4f„7(f( Fˆ§„­¼*…8|•G*œªq„€-ŸkM 4§Ja-œª›•-HœE&*…M§„-Kœ„­D&*m§„8,2§/
m*3jªžE4,4f„7(f( Fˆ§„­¼*…8|•G*œªq„€-ŸkM
lE§G*4K|¯m§„‚G*,2§/ 4§Ja-œª›•-HœE&*…M§„-Kœ„­D&*m§„8,2§/
lE§G*4K|¯m§„‚G*,2§/
œª„kG*¢H~G¨„‚E&¸& * aº*
…8|•G* Ÿq0
…8|•G* Ÿq0
mѪq„€kG*Ž*§I&*
m*3…8*|E&
ÑGj•ªE2
œª„kG*¢H~G¨„‚E&
¸& * aº*
a0*§G*¥/§G*
m*3…8*|E&Ñ
ÑGj•ªE2
Gj•ªE2
m*3…8*|E&
Õ¤/§G*
a0*§G*¥/§G*
m*3…8*|E&
m*3…8*|E&ÑÑGj•ªE2
Gj•ªE2
Õ¤/§G*
a0*§G*¥/§G*
m*3…8*|E&
m*3…8*|E&ÑÑGj•ªE2
Gj•ªE2
Õ¤/§G*
a0*§G*¥/§G*
m*3…8*|E&ÑGj•ªE2
Õ¤/§G*
j•ªE2
…8|•G* Ÿq0
…8|•G* Ÿq0
mѪq„€kG*Ž*§I&*
j•ªE2
j•ªE2
j•ªE2
j•ªE2
Ÿ„6
m§„‚G*
j•ªE2
Ÿ„6
m§„‚G*
j•ªE2
Ÿ„6
j•ªE2
j•†¡¼*ŸE4
j•†¡¼*ŸE4
a+¸Kj•†¡¼*h„€0 .…8*|E&*œ„HK…8*|E&*¢HœF~ªH|-ŸkM
–D*§- a<jGf0·…8|•G*œª„-¢˜Ê¨k0–:f¡¼*5§H4–D*§k-£&*
a+¸Kj•†¡¼*h„€0 .…8*|E&*œ„HK…8*|E&*¢HœF~ªH|-ŸkM
…8|•G*œª„-ŸkM¢G5§H|G*
–D*§- a<jGf0·…8|•G*œª„-¢˜Ê¨k0–:f¡¼*5§H4–D*§k-£&*
jª’›»*j0§›G*¨›<œ„¼**{¤Gj•†¡¼*~H4¨›<4§nŒG*¢˜ÊK
…8|•G*œª„-ŸkM¢G5§H|G*
jª’›»*j0§›G*¨›<œ„¼**{¤Gj•†¡¼*~H4¨›<4§nŒG*¢˜ÊK
DVD-C350
١
▼
٣
٢
▼
٣
٥
٦
▼
▼
▼
'
‫امحلا‬
‫خسنلا نم ةي‬
m§„‚G*
.‫ ﺍﻠﻣﺯ ﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺷﻓﺭﺓ ﻟﻟﺤﻣﺎ ﻴﺔ ﻩﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺢ‬DVD ‫ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺡﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
'
Ÿ„6
‫ ﻤﺑﺎ ﺷﺮ ﺓ‬DVD ‫ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ‬
m§„‚G* ‫ ﻴﺟﺏ ﻋﻟﻳﻙ ﻔﻗﻁ ﺘﻭ ﺼﻳﻝ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ‬،‫ﻭﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺏ‬
§Maª’G*
Ÿ„6
‫ﺤﻳﺙ ﻴﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﺏ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻫﺫ ﻩ‬.‫ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺗﻟﻓﺎﺯ ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺣﺩ ﺃﺠﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻓﻳﺩﻴﻭ‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‬DVD ‫ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ‬
§Maª’G*‫ﺍﻟﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻔﻳﺩﻴﻭ ﻈﻬﻭﺭ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻤﺷﻭ ﻫﺔ ﻤﻥ‬
Ÿ„6
.‫ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻓﺎﻅ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺤﻗﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻴﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺗﻗﻧﻳﺔ‬
'!
Ÿ„6
‫ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﺭﺍﺀﺕﺍﻻﺨﺗﺭﺍﻉ‬m§„‚G*
‫ﺑﻭﺍﺴﻃﺔ ﺴﻳﺎﺴﺎﺕ ﻮﺍﺸﺗﺭ ﺍﻃﺎﺕﻤﻭﺿﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺴﻃﺔ‬
'!
‫ﺍﻠﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺘﻣﺗﻛﻬﺎﺸﺭﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺤﻗﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻟﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻠﻓﻛﺭﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻤﺭ ﻴﻜﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ‬
Ÿ„6
m§„‚G*
§Maª’G*‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ‬Rovi Corporation
.‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻟﻛﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﻭﺤﻗﻭﻕ‬
Ÿ„6
Corporation ‫ﻴﺟﺏ ﺃﺏ ﺗﹸﺻﺭﺡ ﺸﺭﻜﺔ‬
Rovi
§Maª’G*
Ÿ„6‫ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻴﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺨﻳﺹ‬،‫ﻟﻼﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺘﻗﻧﻳﺔ ﺤﻣﺎﻴﺔ ﺤﻗﻭﻕ ﺍﻠﻧﺳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﻤﻛﺎﻨﻳﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺽ‬
&!
Rovi
‫ﺍﻠﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ ﻔﻗﻁ ﻤﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻴﺗﻡ‬
Ÿ„6Corporation ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭ ﻴﺢ ﺑﻐﻳﺭﺫﻟﻙ ﻤﻥ ﻘﺑﻝ‬
.‫ﺍﻟﻌﻛﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻮ ﺍﻟﻓﻙ‬
‫ﻴﹸﺣﻆﺭ ﺍﻟﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻧﺩ ﺴﺔ‬
&!
Ÿ„6
5@* z?999
:F.6BD:7:655@*
§ :F.
O6
6
6
z?9
99
ŽD
i
F
D2
2%%‹ Ž‹”D6
2
61
6
1ܤ
1
:F.6BD:7:65 § :F. O6
6
6
_>>>0‹O
‹ _
§ :F.$6DG@B<C?4 Ÿ F”D!
!
ŽD
i
F
D2
2%%‹ Ž‹”D6
2
61
6
1ܤ
1
vU?
?
?
Q
‹ E
b(
(
_>>>0‹O
‹ _
§ :F.$6DG@B<C?4 Ÿ F”D!
!
،DivX ‫ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ‬
DivX
vU?
?
?
Q
‹ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
E
b(
(“
…8|•G*mfHÑ<
…8|•G*mfHÑ<
M
j•†¡¼*ŸE4
j•†¡¼*ŸE4
™G3¾((*fHKfªIf¼&*Kf„€I|DK,atk¼*j˜›ž¼*·($ o+ f‰I
($
™G3¾((*fHKfªIf¼&*Kf„€I|DK,atk¼*j˜›ž¼*·
($ o+ f‰I
«žE|G*«gGK2…8|E
($
M
«žE|G*«gGK2…8|E
§M΄6*…8|E
$%#!
§M΄6*…8|E
«žE|G*m§„‚G*…8|E
$%#!
%
«žE|G*m§„‚G*…8|E
,+ …8|E
%
$!& $!& ,+ …8|E
%( …8|E
%( …8|E
¢˜Ê¸oª0,a0*§G*,|¼*·‡•Da0*K ' …8|Ef12(*( ™ª›<hqM
œ„¯“›-p*a0((*·™G3hg„€kMf¯4Kfž¤›ª„-KÐF*& K&*& Մ8|Ef12*(
¢˜Ê¸oª0,a0*§G*,|¼*·‡•Da0*K ' …8|Ef12(
*( ™ª›<hqM
'
…8*|E&*
œ„¯“›-p*a0((*·™G3hg„€kMf¯4Kfž¤›ª„-KÐF*& K&*& Մ8|Ef12*(
' …8*|E&*
ΕΎσΎϴΘΣϻ΍
‫ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻳﺎﻃﺎﺖ‬
‫ﺠﺩﻭﻞ ﺍﻠﻤﺤﺗﻭﻴﺎﺕ‬
/MPEG4/JPEG/WMA/MP3 ‫ﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻗﺎﻄﻊ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺖ‬
٨. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﻗﺭﺺ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻭﻄ‬
٨. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻴﺩ ﺍﻠﺣﺟﻠﺪ‬
٨. . . . . . . . . ‫ ﻗﺭﺺ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻭﻄ‬MP3/WMA ‫ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
٨. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG4 ‫ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
USB ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺖ ﺍﻠﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﻤﻳﺯﺓ ﻤﺿﻴﻒ‬
٩. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (DVD-C450K,C450,C360 ‫)ﻔﻗﻄ‬
١٠. . . (DVD-C450K,C450,C360 ‫ﺍﻠﻧﺴﺦ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﹸﺪﻣﹶﺞ )ﻔﻗﻄ‬
١٠. . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﻗﺮﺺ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺮﺍﻠﻀﻐﻭﻃ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﺺ ﺑﺎﻠﺼﻭﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻆﺎﺋﻒ ﻜﺎﺭﻭﻜﻲ‬
١٠. . . . . . . . . . (DVD-C450K,C350K ‫ﻭﻆﺎﺋﻒ ﻜﺎﺭﻭﻜﻲ )ﻔﻗﻄ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
١١. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪ‬
١١. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺪ ﻤﻴﺯﺍﺖ ﺍﻠﻟﻐﺔ‬
١١. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺪ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺖ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺖ‬
١١. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺖ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺽ‬
١١. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺇﻋﺪ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻵ ﺑﺎﺀ‬
١١. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DivX ‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺭﺟﻊ‬
١٢. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺍﺴﺘﻛﺷﺎﻒ ﺍﻵﺧﻃﺎ ﻮﺇﺻﻼ ﺤﻬﺎ‬
١٢. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺍﻠﻭﺍﺼﻔﺎﺖ‬
٢. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻳﺎﻃﺎﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪ‬
٢. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﻤﻳﺯﺍﺖ ﻋﺎﻤﺔ‬
٣. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺍﻠﻭﺼﻒ‬
٤. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺍﺴﺗﻜﺷﺎﻒ ﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺘﻭﺻﻳﻼﺖ‬
٥. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺮ ﺇﺤﺪﻯ ﺍﻠﺘﻭﺼﻴﻼﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻭﻈﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺴﺎﺴﻴﺔ‬
٦. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻞ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺺ‬
٦. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺪﺍﻢ ﻭﻅﻴﻓﺘﻲ ﺍﻠﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻠﺛﺧﻄﻲ‬
٦. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺾ‬
٦. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺪﺍﻢ ﻭﻅﻴﻓﺘﻲ ﺍﻠﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻠﺘﺧﻄﻲ‬
٦. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺘﻛﺭﺍﺮ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ‬GGG
٧. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺍﻠﺗﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻠﺑﻄﻲﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻭﻈﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻠﻣﺗﻗﺪﻤﺔ‬
٧. . . . . . . (EZ VIEW)‫ﺿﺑﻄ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭ ﺗﻓﺎﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺽ‬
GGG
٧. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺖ‬
٧. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻴﺪ ﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﺼﺎ ﺤﺑﺔ‬
٧. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺰﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﻛﺎﻤﻴﺭﺍ‬
٧. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﻭ ﻆﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﻼﻤﺎﺖ‬
٨. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ‫ﺍﻠﺘﺼﻐﻳﺭ‬/‫ﺍﺴﺗﺧﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻠﻭﻆﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻠﺗﻛﺑﻴﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺯﺍﺖﻋﺎﻤﺔ‬
Ω΍ΪϋϹ΍˺
ιήϘϟ΍˽
ΔλΎΨϟ΍εήϟ΍Ω΍Ϯϣϡ΍ΪΨΘγΎΑιήϘϟ΍ϒϴψϨΗϡΪϋΐΠϳ ϭ΃ϥΎϫΪϟ΍ϒϴϔΨΗϞ΋Ύγϭ΃ϦϳΰϨΒϟ΍ϭ΃ΕϼϴΠδΘϟ΍΢δϤΑ
ϲϓΐΒδΘΗΪϗϲΘϟ΍ϭϯήΧϷ΍ΓήϳΎτΘϤϟ΍ΕΎΒϳάϤϟ΍ϦϣΎϫήϴϏ
ιήϘϟ΍΢τδΑϒϠΗΙϭΪΣ
ϦϣιήϘϟ΍Ϛδϣ΍
ιήϘϟ΍Ε΍έΎη·΢τγβϤϟϡΪϋΐΠϳ ϒμΘϨϤϟΎΑΓΩϮΟϮϤϟ΍ΔΤΘϔϟ΍ϭϑ΍ϮΤϟ΍ϯΪΣ·
˱
ΔότϗΎ˱ϣΪΨΘδϣ΢δϤϟΎΑΎϘϠτϣϢϘΗϻϭϖϓήΑΔΑήΗϷ΍΢δϣ΍
ιήϘϟ΍ϕϮϓΎ˱ΑΎϳ·ϭΎ˱ΑΎϫΫεΎϤϗ
ΔϴΌϴΒϟ΍ΕΎϣϮϠόϤϟ΍˾
ϲϔϠΨϟ΍˯ΰΠϟΎΑΩϮΟϮϤϟ΍ϒϳήόΘϟ΍ϖμϠϣϰϟ·ωϮΟήϟ΍ϰΟή˵ϳ ϞϴϐθΘϠϟΔΤϴΤμϟ΍ΔϴΘϟϮϔϟ΍ΔΟέΩΔϓήόϤϟϞϐθϤϟ΍Ϧϣ
ΔϴϓΎϛΔϳϮϬΗΕΎΤΘϔΑΩϭΰϣϕϭΪϨλϲϓϞϐθϤϟ΍ΐϴϛήΘΑϢϗ ϱ΄ΑΔλΎΨϟ΍ΔϳϮϬΘϟ΍ΕΎΤΘϓΪγϡΪϋΐΠϳϢγ˺˹ϰϟ·̀
˯΍ϮϬϟ΍ϥ΍έϭΪΑΡΎϤδϠϟΕΎϧϮϜϤϟ΍Ϧϣ
Ύ˱ϳϭΪϳϞΧ΍Ϊϟ΍ϰϟ·ι΍ήϗϷ΍ΝέΩϊϓΩϡΪϋΐΠϳ ΕΎϧϮϜϤϟ΍βϳΪϜΗϡΪϋΐΠϳ ϞϐθϤϟ΍ϚϳήΤΗϞΒϗΕΎϧϮϜϤϟ΍ϊϴϤΟϞϴϐθΗϑΎϘϳ·ϦϣΪϛ΄Η ΍άϬΑΎϬϠϴλϮΗϞΒϗϯήΧϷ΍ΕΎϧϮϜϤϟ΍ϞϴϐθΗϑΎϘϳ·ϦϣΪϛ΄Η ϞϐθϤϟ΍
G
G
GGG GG
ΔϳϭΎϤϴϛΩ΍ϮϣϰϠϋΞΘϨϤϟ΍΍άϫϲϓΔϣΪΨΘδϤϟ΍ΔϳέΎτΒϟ΍ϱϮΘΤΗ
ΔΌϴΒϟΎΑΓέΎο
˱
ΎϘϓϭˬΔΤϴΤμϟ΍ΔϘϳήτϟΎΑΕΎϳέΎτΒϟ΍ϦϣκϠΨΘϟ΍ϰΟή˵
ϳˬ΍άϟ
ΔϴϠΤϤϟ΍ϭΔϴϟϭΪϟ΍ϭΔϴϟ΍έΪϴϔϟ΍Ϧϴϧ΍ϮϘϠϟ
�
GGG
˯ΎϬΘϧϻ΍ΪόΑϞϐθϤϟ΍ϞϴϐθΗϑΎϘϳ·ϭιήϘϟ΍Ν΍ήΧ·ϦϣΪϛ΄Η
G
�
ΓήΘϔϟϪϣ΍ΪΨΘγ΍ϡΪϋϡΰΘόΗΖϨϛ΍Ϋ·ΎϤϴγϻϭˬϡ΍ΪΨΘγϻ΍Ϧϣ
G GG ΔϠϳϮσ
˱
ΔϳήϜϓΔϴϜϠϣϕϮϘΤϟΎϘϓϭΔμΧήϣϞϴϟΪϟ΍΍άϬΑΔϘϓήϤϟ΍ΞΘϨϤϟ΍ΓΪΣϭ
ϡ΍ΪΨΘγϻ΍ϰϠϋκϴΧήΘϟ΍΍άϫήμΘϘϳ
ϯήΧ΃ϑ΍ήσ΃ΕΎϛήθϟΓΩΪΤϣ
GG
G
ΕΎϳϮΘΤϤϟ΍ϦϣϊϔΘϨϤϟ΍ϲ΋ΎϬϨϟ΍ϞϴϤόϟ΍Δτγ΍ϮΑϱέΎΠΘϟ΍ήϴϏιΎΨϟ΍
ν΍ήϏϷίΎϬΠϟ΍΍άϫϡ΍ΪΨΘγϻΔΣϮϨϤϣϕϮϘΣΪΟϮΗϻϭ
ΔμΧή˵Ϥϟ΍
ϩάϫϑϼΨΑϯήΧ΃ΞΘϨϣΓΪΣϭϱ΃κϴΧήΘϟ΍΍άϫϲτϐϳϻ
ΔϳέΎΠΗ
ήϴϏΔϴϠϤϋϭ΃ΞΘϨϣΓΪΣϭϱ΃κϴΧήΘϟ΍ϞϤθϳϻϚϟάϛϭˬΓΪΣϮϟ΍
*&&,)ϭ΃ *&&,)ϖΑΎτΗΔμΧήϣ
ϲτϐϳϚϟάϛ
ΔϴϟΎΤϟ΍ΞΘϨϤϟ΍ΓΪΣϮΑΔϘϓήϣωΎΒΗϡ΃ϡΪΨΘδ˵ΗΖϧΎϛ˯΍Ϯγ
ήϴϔθΗϚϓϭ΃ϭήϴϔθΘϟΔϴϟΎΤϟ΍ΞΘϨϤϟ΍ΓΪΣϭϡ΍ΪΨΘγ΍ςϘϓκϴΧήΘϟ΍
ϭ΃ *&&,)ϊϣϖΑΎτΘΗϲΘϟ΍ΕϮμϟ΍ΕΎϔϠϣ
ΎϤϴϓκϴΧήΘϟ΍΍άϫΐΟϮϤΑϕϮϘΣ΢ϨϣϢΘϳϢϟ
*&&,)
*&&,)ϖΑΎτΗϻϲΘϟ΍Ϫϔ΋Ύχϭϭ΃ΞΘϨϤϟ΍Ε΍ΰϴϤΑϖϠόΘϳ
*&&,)ϭ΃
G GG
G ϚΘϣϼδϟ˻
G
GG
�
ήλΎϨϋϡ΍ΪΨΘγ΍ϱΩΆϳΪϗϭ
έΰϴϠϟ΍ωΎόηΞΘϨϤϟ΍΍άϫϡΪΨΘδϳ
ΎϨϫΔϨϴΒϤϟ΍ϚϠΗήϴϏΕ΍˯΍ήΟϹ΍˯΍Ω΃ϭ΃ΕϼϳΪόΘϟ΍ϭ΃ϢϜΤΘϟ΍
G
ήϴτΧϞϜθΑωΎόηϺϟνήόΘϟ΍ϰϟ·
GG GGG
G
�
�� ���� ���G ����� �������G ������
G ���� ������� ��� G � ��� �� �� �������
�
G ���
G
G
ϚδϔϨΑΡϼλϹ΍ΕΎϴϠϤϋ˯΍ήΟ·ϭΔϴτϏϷ΍΢ΘϓϡΪϋΐΠϳ ςϘϓϦϴϠϫΆϣϦϴϴϨϔϟΔϧΎϴμϟ΍ϝΎϤϋ΃ϙήΗ΍
ϪϴΒϨΗ˼
ΔϴϋΎϨλν΍ήϏ΃ϲϓϪϣ΍ΪΨΘγ΍ϢΘϴϟϞϐθϤϟ΍ϢϴϤμΗϢΘϳϢϟ ςϘϓϲμΨθϟ΍ϡ΍ΪΨΘγϼϟΞΘϨϤϟ΍΍άϫ
ΔϴϟΰϨϣν΍ήϏϷϦϜϟϭ
� ��� ����� ���� �� ����� ������ ������ ���� ��� ��� ςΒπϟ΍Ε΍Ω΍Ϊϋ·ϭ΃ϢϜΤΘϟ΍έ΍έί΃ϡ΍ΪΨΘγ΍ϱΩΆϳΪϗϪϴΒϨΗ . ������ ���� ��� ����� ��� ����� ����� ���� ���� �� ���
νήόΘϟ΍ϰϟ·ϞϴϟΪϟ΍΍άϬΑΓΩέ΍Ϯϟ΍ϑϼΨΑΕ΍˯΍ήΟ·άϴϔϨΗϭ΃
ΔϨϛΎδϟ΍˯ΎΑήϬϜϟ΍ϭϕήΒϟΎϛΔϴΟέΎΨϟ΍Ϟϣ΍Ϯόϟ΍ήΛΆΗϥ΃ϦϜϤϳ ήϴτΨϟ΍ωΎόηϺϟ ˬΔϠϜθϤϟ΍ϩάϫΖϬΟ΍ϭ΍Ϋ·
ϞϐθϤϟ΍΍άϬϟϲόϴΒτϟ΍ϞϴϐθΘϟ΍ϰϠϋ
έΰϟ΍ϰϠϋςϐπϟΎΑϪϠϴϐθΗΪϋ΃ϢΛϞϐθϤϟ΍ϞϴϐθΗϑΎϘϳΈΑϢϘϓ
Ϊϋ΃ϢΛΩΩήΘϤϟ΍ϲΑήϬϜϟ΍έΎϴΘϟ΍ϚϠγϞμϓ΍ϭ΃ˬ'&.)
ϰϠϋϞϐθϤϟ΍ϞϤόϴγ
ΩΩήΘϤϟ΍ϲΑήϬϜϟ΍έΎϴΘϟ΍άϔϨϤΑϪϠϴλϮΗ
ϲόϴΒσϮΤϧ
(DVD-C450K,C450, C360 ‫)ﻔﻗﻄ‬
Ε΍ήϴϴϐΗΙϭΪΤϟΔΠϴΘϧϞϐθϤϟ΍ϞΧ΍ΩϒΛΎϜΗΙϭΪΣΔϟΎΣϲϓ ϮΤϧϰϠϋϞϐθϤϟ΍ϞϤόϳϻΎϤΑέˬΓέ΍ήΤϟ΍ΕΎΟέΩϲϓΓΪϳΪη
ΔΟέΩϲϓϞϐθϤϟ΍ϙήΗ΍ˬΔϠϜθϤϟ΍ϩάϫΙϭΪΣΔϟΎΣϲϓ
ϢϴϠγ
˱
ΎϓΎΟϞϐθϤϟ΍ϦϣϲϠΧ΍Ϊϟ΍˯ΰΠϟ΍΢ΒμϳϰΘΣΔϓήϐϟ΍Γέ΍ήΣ
ϞϤόϠϟ΍Ϊ˱ όΘδϣϭ
٢
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻭﺻﻴﻼﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺮ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻮﺼﻴﻼﺖ‬
‫‪ .A‬ﺍﻠﺘﻭﺼﻴﻞ ﺒﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺩﻴﻭ(‬
‫ ﺑﺎﺴﺗﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﻜﺎﺑﻼﺖ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺖ ‪ /‬ﺍﻠﻔﻴﺩﻴﻭ ‪ ،‬ﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻭﺻﻴﻝ ﻄﺭﻔﻲﺍﻠﺘﻭﺻﻴﻝ ‪) VIDEO‬ﺍﻷﺼﻔﺭ( ‪AUDIO OUT/‬‬‫)ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺤﻤﺮ( ﺑﺎ ﻠﺟﺯﺀ ﺍﻠﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻤﻦ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻘﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻄﺭﻔﻲ ﺘﻭﺻﻴﻝ ‪) VIDEO‬ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ( ‪) AUDIO IN /‬ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺤﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ�‬
‫ ﻗﻡ ﺒﺘﺷﻐﻳﻞ ﻤﺸﻐﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺰ�‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ TV/VIDEO‬ﺑﻭﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺩ ﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻠﺘﺤﺩﻴﺪ ‪Video‬‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻆﺔ‬
‫ ﻣﺎﻫﻭ”ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻗﺪﻡ”؟‬‫ ﻴﺗﻤﻴﺯ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻘﺪﻢ ﺑﺄﻨﻪ ﻳﺘﺿﻣﻥ ﺧﻄﻭﻄ ﺍﺴﺗﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺧﻄﻭﻄ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻌﺮﺍﺾ ﺍﻠﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻴﻗﺔ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻠﺗﺪﺍﺧﻝ ‪.‬ﻳﻤﻛﻥ ﺃﻦ ﺘﻤﻨﺤﻙ ﻃﺭﻴﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻻﺴﺗﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻠﻣﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ﻭﺃﻓﺿﻝ�‬
‫ﻷﺒﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻤﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﺮﻴﻭ ﺜﻧﺎﺌﻲ ﺍﻠﻘﻧﻮﺍﺕ‪,‬‬
‫ﻤﺿﺨﻢ ﺻﻭﺖ ﺪﻭﻠﺑﻲ ﺮﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪DTS‬‬
‫ﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﻭ ﻣﺤﻭﺮﻴﻥ‬
‫ﻷﺒﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻷﺒﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺮﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻆﺔ‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺚ ﺘﺸﻭﻳﺶ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻦ ﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ ﺸﺪﻴﺩ ﺍﻠﻘﺮﺏ ﻤﻥ ﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﻜﻬﺭﺑﻲ‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺮﺪﺕ ﺍﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺒﻣﺿﺨﻢ ﺻﻭﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﯾُُﺭﺠﻰ ﺍﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻤﺿﺧﻢ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ�‬‫ ﻳﺧﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻄﺭﺍﻒ ﺍﻠﺘﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﻭ ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺤﺴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺰ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻓﺎﺯ� ﻓﯾُُﺭﺠﻰ ﺍﻠﺮﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺩﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺗﺨﺩﻡ ﺍﻠﺨﺎﺺ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻭﺠﻭﺪ ﻄﺭﻒ ﺘﻭﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﻠﺤﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺗﻭﺼﻴﻠﻪ‬‫ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻋﺪﻢ ﺇﺪﺤﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻘﺮﺹ ‪ ،‬ﻴﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻠﻭ ﻀﻊ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺑﻂﺭﻒ ﺗﻭﺼﻴﻞ )‪) (AUDIO OUT‬ﺍﻷﻴﺴﺮ( )ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺾ( ﺍﻠﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻗﺮ ﺍﺺ ‪�DVD‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ VIDEO SEL‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺷﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻔﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﻭﻘﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺪﺧﺎﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺭﺺ ‪,‬ﻴﺘﻐﻳﺮ ﺍﻠﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻠﺗﻭﻘﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻔﻲ‬
‫ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻃ‬‫ﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻠﻔﻴﺪﻴﻭ ﺑﺎﻠﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻠﺗﺎﻠﻲ ‪P-SCAN -I-SCAN :‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ‬
‫ﻜﺎﺒﻞ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻓﻴﺪﻴﻭ‬
‫ﻜﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺮﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ‬
‫ﻷﺒﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ .B‬ﺍﻠﺘﻭﺼﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﻇﺎﻢ ﺼﻭﺖ )ﻤﺿﺧﻡ ﺼﻭﺖ ﺜﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻠﻘﻧﻭﺍﺖ‪ Dolby digital ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ MPEG2‬ﺃﻭﻣﺿﺧﻢ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ ‪(DTS‬‬
‫ ﺑﺎﺴﺗﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﻜﺎﺑﻼﺖ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺖ ‪،‬ﻘﻡ ﺑﺘﻭ ﺻﻴﻞ‬‫ﻄﺮﻔﻲ ﺘﻭﺼﻴﻝ ‪) AUDIO OUT‬ﺍﻷﺤﻤﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ﺒﺎﻠﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﻠﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺷﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺺ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻄﺮﻔﻲ ﺘﻭﺻﻴﻝ ‪AUDIO IN‬‬
‫)ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺽ( ﺑﻤﺿﺨﻡ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ �‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺘﺴﺗﺨﺩﻢ ﻜﺎﺑﻼًﺫﺍ ﻣﺤﻭﺭﻴﻥ )ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ‪ ،‬ﻔﻗﻡ ﺑﺘﻭﺻﻴﻞ ﻄﺮﻒ ﺘﻭﺻﻴﻞ )‪OUTPUT (COAXIAL‬‬‫‪ DIGITAL‬ﺍﻠﻭﺟﻭﺪ ﺑﺎﻠﺟﺯﺀ ﺍﻠﺨﻠﻓﻲ ﻠﺷﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺺ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻄﺮﻒ ﺘﻭﺻﻴﻝ )‪ DIGITAL AUDIO IN (COAXIAL‬ﻠﺿﺧﻢ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ�‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫ ﺑﺎﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﻜﺎﺑﻝ )ﻜﺎﺑﻼﺖ( ﺇﺷﺎﺮﺍﺖ ﺍﻠﻓﻳﺪﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺒﺗﻭﺼﻳﻞ ﺃﻄﺭﺍﻒ ﺍﻠﺘﻭﺻﻴﻞ ‪ VIDEO‬ﺃﻭ ‪ COMPONENT OUT‬ﺑﺎﻠﺟﺯﺀ‬‫ﺍﻠﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺷﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺺ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻄﺭﻒ ﺘﻭ ﺻﻴﻞ ‪ VIDEO‬ﺃﻭ ‪ COMPONENT OUT‬ﺍﻠﻭﺠﻭﺪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ�‬
‫ ﺑﺘﺷﻐﻳﻞ ﻣﺷﻑﻞﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﻤﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ�‬‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻴﺪ ﺍﻠﺩﺨﻞ ﻠﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﻠﺗﺤﺪﻳﺩ ﺍﻠﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺮﺠﻳﻲ ﻠﺴﻣﺎﻉ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺖ ﻤﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞﺃﻗﺮﺍﺺ ‪�DVD‬‬‫‪ .C‬ﺍﻠﺗﻭﺼﻴﻞ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺘﻠﻓﺎﺯ )ﺗﺩﺍﺨﻝ ‪ /‬ﻤﺗﻘﺩﻢ (‬
‫ ﺑﺎﺴﺗﺨﺪﺍﻢ ﻜﺎﺒﻼﺖ ﻔﻴﺪﻴﻭ ﺍﻠﻤﻜﻭﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻭﺼﻴﻞ ﻄﺮﻓ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻞ‬‫‪ COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬ﺍﻠﻣﺭﺟﻭﺪ ﺑﺎﻠﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﻠﺧﻠﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﺷﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻂﺭﻒ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ‪ COMPONENT IN‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ�‬
‫ ﻄﺭﻔﻲ ﺘﻭﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺴﺗﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﻜﺎﺑﻼﺖ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻄﺭﻓﻲ ﺘﻭﺻﻳﻞ ‪) AUDIO OUT‬ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺤﻣﺮ( ﺑﺎﻠﺟﺯﺀ ﺍﻠﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻣﺷﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺺ‬‫‪ DVD‬ﺑﻄﺭﻔﻲ ﺗﻭﺻﻴﻞ ‪) AUDIO IN‬ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺤﻣﺭ( ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺮ ﺍﻠﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ �ﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻤﺷﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺺ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ�‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺧﺩﺪ ﺍﻠﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺗﺤﻛﻢ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺯﻴﻭﻥ ﺤﺗﻰ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺮﺓ ﺍﻠﻤﻜﻭﻦ ﺍﻠﺻﺎﺪﺮ ﺓ ﻤﻦ ﻤﺷﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ�‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻠﻔﻳﺪﻳﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ P-SCAN/I-SCAN‬ﻔﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Display Setup‬ﻴﻣﻜﻦ ﺍﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ VIDEO SEL.‬ﻔﻲ ﺗﻐﻳﻴﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻠﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ�‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ ٠١‬ﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺺ‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻠﻘﺭ ﺺ ﻫﻨﺎ�‬
‫‬
‫‪ ٠٢‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﻨﺎ�‬
‫‪OPEN/CLOSE/STOP ( ) ٠٣‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ﻠﻓﺘﺢ ﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺺ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻘﻪ�‬
‫ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪) STOP (■ )٠٤‬ﻔﻗﻄ ‪(DVD-C450K,C450‬‬
‫ﻹﻴﻘﺎﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺾ‬
‫‪ ( ) ٠٥‬ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻗﺎﻒﺍﻠﺅﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻠﺑﺩﺀ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻞ ﺍﻠﻗﺮﺺﺃﻭ ﺇﻴﻘﺎﻒ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻤﺆﻗﺘًﺎ‬
‫‬
‫‪POWER ON/OFF ( ) ٠٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻒ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻞ ﺍﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ�‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻠﺘﺷﻐﻳﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻒ‬
‫‪DVD-C350K‬‬
‫‪DVD-C350‬‬
‫‪ ٠٧‬ﻤﻀﻳﻒ ‪USB‬‬
‫)ﻔﻗﻄ ‪(DVD-C360,C450,C450K‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺭﻗﻤﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻤﺸﻐﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﺒﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻠﺫﺍﻜﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻠﺑﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺍﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻭﺤﺪﺍﺖ ﺍﻠﺘﺨﺯﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺨﺮﻯ ﺍﻠﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻠﻺﺯﺍﻠﺔ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪MIC ٠٨‬‬
‫)ﻔﻗﻄ ‪(DVD-C450K,DVD-C350K‬‬
‫ﻠﺘﻭﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﻠﻴﻛﺮﻔﻭﻦ ﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻈﺎﺋﻒ ﻛﺎﺭﻭﻛﻲ�‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺗﺣﻛﻢ ﻋﻥ ﺒﹸﻌﺩ‬
‫‪DVD-C450K‬‬
‫‪DVD-C450‬‬
‫‪DVD-C360‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ POWER‬ﻠﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺺ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻭ ﺤﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻒ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﺯﺭ ‪REPEAT‬‬
‫ﻔﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻤﺎﺪﺓ ﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻘﺮﺺ�‬
‫‪ �٣‬ﺯﺭ ‪DISC MENU‬‬
‫ﻹﻅﻬﺎﺮ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺭ ﺍﺺ�‬
‫‪ �٤‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻠﻌﻼﻤﺔ ‪BOOKMARK‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪ �٥‬ﺯﺭﺍ ‪) SEARCH‬‬
‫ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻤﺎﻢ‪/‬ﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺨﻼﻞ ﺍﻠﻗﺮﺹ�‬
‫ﻴﺘﻴﺤﺎﻥ ﻠﻚ ﺍﻠﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫(‬
‫‪ �٦‬ﺯﺭ ‪) STOP‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪ �٧‬ﺯﺭﺍ ‪) SKIP‬‬
‫ﺍﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﻔﺻﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻠﻤﺎﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ�‬
‫ﻴﺴﺘﺨﺩﻤﺎﻥ ﻠﺘﺨﻃﻲ ﺍﻠﻌﻨﻭ‬
‫‪ �٨‬ﺯﺭ ‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺮ ﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻤﺷﻐﻞ ﺃﻘﺮﺍﺺ ‪�DVD‬‬
‫‪ �٩‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ®‪ENTER /π/†,√/‬‬
‫ﻴﻌﻤﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ﻜﻤﻓﺘﺎﺡ ﺘﺒﺪﻴﻝ�‬
‫‪ �١٠‬ﺯﺭ ‪(√) AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﻤﻭﺠﻭﺪﺓ�‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﺧﺪﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ﻠﻠﻭﺻﻭﻞ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻭﻅﺎﺌﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻗﺮﺺ�‬
‫‪ �١١‬ﺯﺭ ‪INFO‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻠﻗﺮﺺ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﻠﻲ�‬
‫ﻠﻌﺭﺽ ‬
‫(‬
‫‪) OPEN/CLOSE‬‬
‫‪ �١٢‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫‬
‫ﻠﻔﺗﺢ ﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻘﺮﺍﺺ ﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ�‬
‫‪ �١٣‬ﺯﺭ ‪REPEAT A-B‬‬
‫ﺾ ﺑﻳﻦ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺺ�‬
‫ﻴﺴﺘﺧﺩﻢ ﻠﺘﻜﺭ ﻴﺭﺍﻠﻌﺭ‬
‫‪ �١٤‬ﺯﺭ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪VIDEO SEL.‬‬
‫‪ �١٥‬ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‬
‫ﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻀﻊ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻠﻔﻳﺪﻴﻭ�‬
‫(‬
‫‪) PLAY/PAUSE‬‬
‫‪ �١٦‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫‬
‫ﻠﺒﺩﺀ ﺍﻠﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻒ ﺍﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻞ ﺍﻠﻣﺆ ﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻗﺮﺹ�‬
‫‪(π) SUBTITLE‬‬
‫‪ �١٧‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫‬
‫‪ �١٨‬ﺯﺭ ‪RETURN‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺠﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺴﺎﺒﻗﺔ�‬
‫‪(®) TITLE MENU‬‬
‫‪ �١٩‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫‬
‫ﻻﻅﻬﺎﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﻨﺎﻭﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪) (†) KARAOKE‬ﻔﻗﻄ ‪(DVD-C450K‬‬
‫‪ �٢٠‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﺧﺩﻢ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺯﺮﻠﺑﺩﺀ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺌﻒ ﻜﺎﺭﻭﻜﻲ�‬
‫‪CANCEL‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪�٢١‬‬
‫‬
‫ﺍﻠﺯﺮﻹﺨﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻮ ﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻮ ﻋﺮﻮﺾ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﺸﺎﺸﺔ�‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺩﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪ ٠٩‬ﺻﻭﺖ ﺍﻠﻳﻛﺮﻭﻔﻭﻥ‬
‫)ﻔﻗﻄ ‪(DVD-C450K‬‬
‫ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﺼﻭﺖ ﺍﻠﻴﻛﺮﻭﻔﻭﺮ ﻭﻔﻭﻥ�ﻭﻴﺗﻢ ﺍﺴﺗﺨﺩﺍﻡﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ‬
‫ﯾﹸﺴﺘﺨﺩﻢ ﻠﺿﺑﻄ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺮﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻳﻤﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻛﻡ ﻔﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ�‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻪ� ﻘﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ POWER‬ﻠﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺺ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻭ ﺤﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻒ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﺯﺭ ‪REPEAT‬‬
‫ﻔﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻤﺎﺪﺓ ﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻘﺮﺺ�‬
‫‪ �٣‬ﺯﺭ ‪DISC MENU‬‬
‫ﻹﻅﻬﺎﺮ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺭ ﺍﺺ�‬
‫‪ �٤‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻠﻌﻼﻤﺔ ‪BOOKMARK‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪ �٥‬ﺯﺭ ‪) STOP‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪ �٦‬ﺯﺭﺍ ‪) SKIP‬‬
‫ﺍﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﻔﺻﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻠﻤﺎﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ�‬
‫ﻴﺴﺘﺨﺩﻤﺎﻥ ﻠﺘﺨﻃﻲ ﺍﻠﻌﻨﻭ‬
‫‪ �٧‬ﺯﺭ ‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺮ ﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻤﺷﻐﻞ ﺃﻘﺮﺍﺺ ‪�DVD‬‬
‫‪ �٨‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ®‪ENTER /π/†,√/‬‬
‫ﻴﻌﻤﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ﻜﻤﻓﺘﺎﺡ ﺘﺒﺪﻴﻝ�‬
‫‪ �٩‬ﺯﺭ ‪(√) AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﻤﻭﺠﻭﺪﺓ�‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﺧﺪﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ﻠﻠﻭﺻﻭﻞ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻭﻅﺎﺌﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻗﺮﺺ�‬
‫‪ �١٠‬ﺯﺭ ‪INFO‬‬
‫ﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻠﻗﺮﺺ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﻠﻲ�‬
‫‪ �١١‬ﺯﺭ ‪) OPEN/CLOSE‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻘﺮﺍﺺ ﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ�‬
‫ﻠﻔﺗﺢ ﺪﺭﺝ ‬
‫‪REPEAT A-B‬‬
‫‪ �١٢‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫‬
‫ﺾ ﺑﻳﻦ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺺ�‬
‫ﻴﺴﺘﺧﺩﻢ ﻠﺘﻜﺭ ﻴﺭﺍﻠﻌﺭ‬
‫‪ �١٣‬ﺯﺭ ‪ZOOM‬‬
‫‪ �١٤‬ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪VIDEO SEL.‬‬
‫ﻭﻀﻊ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻠﻔﻳﺪﻴﻭ�‬
‫ﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫‬
‫(‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪ �١٥‬ﺯﺭﺍ ‪) SEARCH‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻤﺎﻢ‪/‬ﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺨﻼﻞ ﺍﻠﻗﺮﺹ�‬
‫ﺇﻠﻰ‬
‫‬
‫ﻴﺘﻴﺤﺎﻥ ﻠﻚ ﺍﻠﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫(‬
‫‪ �١٦‬ﺯﺭ ‪) PLAY/PAUSE‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻒ ﺍﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻞ ﺍﻠﻣﺆ ﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻗﺮﺹ�‬
‫ﻠﺒﺩﺀ‬
‫‬
‫‪ �١٧‬ﺯﺭ ‪(π) SUBTITLE‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫‪ �١٨‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺠﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺴﺎﺒﻗﺔ�‬
‫‪ �١٩‬ﺯﺭ ‪(®) TITLE MENU‬‬
‫ﻻﻅﻬﺎﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﻨﺎﻭﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ �٢٠‬ﺯﺭ ‪CANCEL‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺯﺮﻹﺨﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻮ ﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻮ ﻋﺮﻮﺾ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﺸﺎﺸﺔ�‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺩﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫‪ �٢١‬ﺯﺭ ‪) (†) KARAOKE‬ﻔﻗﻄ ‪(DVD-C350K‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﺧﺩﻢ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺯﺮﻠﺑﺩﺀ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺌﻒ ﻜﺎﺭﻭﻜﻲ�‬
‫(‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫ﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺮ ﺠﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺎﺣﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﺑﻃﻲﺀ‬
‫ﺘﺷﻴﺢ ﻠﻙ ﻫﺯﻩ ﺍﻠﻤﻴﺯﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﺑﻄﻲ ﺀﻠﻠﻤﺷﺎ ﻫﺪ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﺣﺘﻭ ﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺸﺎ ﻫﺪﺍ ﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺎﻷﺪﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﺭ ﻳﺎﻀﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻠﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻮﺍﻠﻣﻭ ﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻭﻏﻳﺮﻫﺎﺑﺣﻴﺕ ﻋﻴﻛﻧﻚ ﺪﺭﺍﺳﺘﻬﺎﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪﴾ ) PLAY/PAUSE‬‬
‫‪.٢‬ﺍﻀﻔﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪( )SEARCH‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥﺑﻳﻦ ‪ ٢/١‬ﻭ ‪ ٤/ ١‬ﻮ ‪ ٨/ ١‬ﻮ ‪ ٦١/١‬ﻣﻦ ﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻠﺴﺮ ﻋﺔ ﺍﻠﻃﻳﻌﻲ ﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻮﻀﻊ ‪ PAUSE‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻆﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻠﻣﺗﻗﺪﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻀﺒﻃ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺮﺘﻔﺎﻉ ٳﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﺮﺾ )‪(EZ View‬‬
‫ﻠﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﺨﺪﺍﻢ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺮﺘﻔﺎﻉ ٳﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﺮﺾ )‪(DVD‬‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻮﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ INFO‬ﺒﻮﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺤﻛﻢﻋﻦ ﺒُﻌﺪ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﻤﺧﺗﺻﺭ ﺜﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ �٣‬ﺍﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺗﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺃﻭﺪﻴﻭ )‪ ، (EZ View‬ﺜﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ زرﻫت )‪ (EZ View‬أو ®‪ ،√/‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﻠﻰ أﺷﻜﻟل ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ وﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد أدﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺘﺴﺘﺨﺩﻢ ﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯًﺍ ﺑﻨﺴﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻓﺎﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﺮﺾ‪٩�١٦‬‬
‫ﻠﻸﻗﺭﺍﺺﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﺑﻨﺴﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻓﺎﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﺮﺾ ‪٩�١٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺪﺍ ﻜﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺗﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﻧﺴﺑﺔﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉﺇﻠﻰﺍﻠﻌﺭﺾ ‪٣:٤‬‬
‫ﻠﻸﻗﺭﺍﺺ ﺫﺍﺖ ﻨﺴﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺭ ﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪٩�١٦‬‬
‫ ‪NORMAL Wide‬‬‫ ‪Screen Fit‬‬‫‪Zoom Fit -‬‬
‫‪4:3 Letter Box‬‬
‫‪4:3 Pan Scan‬‬
‫‪Screen Fit‬‬
‫‪Zoom Fit‬‬
‫ﻠﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻠﺗﻲ ﺘﻌﻣﻞ ﺑﻧﺴﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻓﺎﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺾ ‪٣�٤‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫‪NORMAL SCREEN‬‬
‫‪Screen Fit‬‬
‫‪Zoom Fit‬‬
‫‪VERTICAL FIT‬‬
‫ﻠﻸﻗﺭﺍﺺ ﺍﻠﺗﻲ ﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻧﺴﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺮﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﺮﺾ ‪٣:٤‬‬
‫‪NORMAL SCREEN‬‬
‫‪Screen Fit‬‬
‫‪Zoom Fit‬‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺪﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻠﻭ ﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺌﺞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ�‬
‫ﺗﺤﺩﻳﺩ ﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺖ‬
‫ﻴﻤﻛﻨﻙ ﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﻃﺎﻭﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺴﺮﻴﻊﻭﺴﻬﻝ ﺑﺎﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.√/AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ‪(DVD/VCD/MPEG4) √/AUDIO‬‬
‫‪.١‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ‪ .√/AUDIO‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﻋﻧﺪ ﺍﻠﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻤﺘﻜﺮﺮ‪ .‬ﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮ ﺾ ﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺴﺘﺧﺪ ﺍﻢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺮ ﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪√/AUDIO‬ﺑﻭ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﻛﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﺷﻜﻝ‬‫ﻤﺘﻜﺮ ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺍﻠﻣﻃﻠﻭ ﺐﻋﻠﻰ ‪ MPEG4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻇﺔ‬
‫ ﺘﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻠﻭ ﻆﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﻢ ﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺘﻌﻤﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻦ ﻳﺣﺘﻭ ﻯ ﻗﺮ ﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺎ ﻴﺼﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ‪ ٨‬ﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺻﻭ ﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﻨﻔﺲ ﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﺼﻭ ﺕ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺘﻢ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻗﺮ ﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻴﻤﻜﻧﻚ ﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﺘﺮ ﺟﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺎ ﺤﺑﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻠﻭﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﺣﻭ ﺴﺮ ﻴﻊﺑﺎﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ‪.SUBTITLE/π‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ‪(DVD/MPEG4) SUBTITLE /π‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ‪ .SUBTITLE /π‬ﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺾﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺘﺮ ﺠﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺎﺣﺑﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﻭ ﺍﻓﺮ ﺓ ﺑﺎﺴﺘﺧﺪ ﺍﻢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺮ ﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻴﺘﻢ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻠﺘﺮ ﺠﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺎﺣﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻠﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ﺑﺷﻜﻝ ﻣﺘﻛﺮﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﻹﺯﺍﻠﺔ ﺍﻠﺮﻣﺯ ‪ ،SUBTITLE‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ SUBTITLE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪.π‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻇﺔ‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﺘﺤﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺘﻐﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻠﺘﺮﺠﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﺻﺎﺤﺑﺔ ﺍﻠﻄﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻔﻲ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ‪.DISC MENU‬‬‫ﺤﺴﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺺ ‪.‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻠﺯﺭ ‪.DISC MENU‬‬
‫ ﺘﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻠﻭ ﻆﻳﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻠﻐﺎﺖ ﺍﻠﺘﺭ ﺠﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﺼﺎﺤﺒﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﻢ ﺗﺷﻓﻴﺭﻫﺎﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻗﺮ ﺺ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﻞ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻴﻤﻛﻦﺃﻦ ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻯ ﻗﺭﺺ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺎﻴﺼﻞ ﺇﻠﻰ‪ ٣٢‬ﻠﻐﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺠﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﺼﺎﺤﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﺬﺍ ﻜﺎﻦ ﻗﺭﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻴﺣﺘﻭ ﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻭ ﺍﻴﺎ ﻤﺘﻌﺪﺪﺓ ﻠﻤﺷﻬﺪ ﻤﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻴﻤﻛﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﻭ ﻅﻴﻔﺔ ‪.ANGLE‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪ ﺍﻢ ﻭ ﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) ANGLE‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺺ ‪(DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﺬﺍﻜﺎﻦ ﺍﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻮ ﺍﻴﺎ ﻤﺘﻌﺪﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻅﻬﺮ ﺍﻠﻭ ﻅﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ANGLE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ‪ INFO‬ﺑﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺣﻜﻢﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺰﺮ ﻴﻥ†‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪ ﻳﺪ ﻤﺧﺗﺻﺭ ﺜﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺰﺭ ﻴﻦ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﺰﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺜﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺰﺭ ﻴﻦ®‪ √/‬ﺑﻭ ﺣﺪ ﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺣﻛﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﺍﻠﺯﺍﻭ ﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﻄﻠﻭ ﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻇﺔ‬
‫ ﺇﺬﺍﻛﺎﻦﺍﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺣﺘﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺤﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻄ‪،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻠﻤﻴﺰ ﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺎﻠﻴًﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻴﺤﺘﻭ ﻱ ﻋﺪﺪ ﻗﻠﻴﻝ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮ ﺍﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻠﻣﻴﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺣﺴﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻠﻭ ﻅﺎﺌﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﻭ ﻆﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﻼﻤﺎﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻠﻚ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻠﻴﺯﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍﺀ ﻗﺭﺺ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭﻗﺭﺺ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (Menu Off‬ﺑﺤﻳﺙ ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻠﻭ ﺻﻭﻞ ﺇﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺤﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﻭ ﻆﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﻼﻤﺎﺖ )‪(DVD/VCD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ INFO‬ﺑﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺣﻜﻢﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺰﺮ ﻴﻥ†‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪ ﻳﺪ ﻤﺧﺗﺻﺭ ﺜﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٣‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺰﺭ ﻴﻦ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻤﺔ ﺜﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٤‬ﻋﻧﺪ ﺍﻠﻭﺻﻭﻞ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺷﻬﺪ ﺍﻠﻄﻠﻭﺏ ﺘﻤﻴﻳﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ ENTER‬ﻴﻤﻛﻦ ﺘﻤﻳﻴﺯ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺇﺛﻧﺎ ﻋﺷﺮﻤﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺭﺓ ﺍﻠﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼ ﺤﻈﺔ‬
‫ ﻋﻧﺪ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺭ ﺼﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩﻻﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻓﺔ ‪ Disc menu‬ﻭﻓﻘًﺎﻠﻟﻘﺮﺺ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺤﺴﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺺ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪﻻ ﺘﻌﻣﻞ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪Bookmark‬‬
‫‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻤﻤﻴﺯ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪. ٣-١‬ﺘﺗﻤﺎﺜﻞ ﺍﻠﺧﻄﻭﺍﺖ ﻣﻦ‪ ٣-١‬ﻤﻊ ﺗﻠﻚﺍﻠﻭﺍﺮﺪﺓ ﻔﻲ "ﺍﺴﺧﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﻠﻌﻼﻤﺎﺖ"‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺻﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻳﻥ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻤﻳﺯ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ ( )PLAY/PAUSE‬ﻟﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻠﺷﻬﺪ ﺍﻟُﻤﻳﺯﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻆﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺴﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﺯﺭ®‪ √/‬ﻹﺣﺮﺇﻹﻋﺪ ﺍﺪ ﺍﻠﻁﻠﻮ ﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍ ﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻟﻰ ﻠﺯﺮ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ ﻘﺩ ﺘﺴﺘﺧﺪﻢﺍﻠﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮ ﺤﺩﺓﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻢ ﻋﻦﺒﻌﺪ ﻟﻟﻮ ﺼﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻤﺑﺎﺸﺭﺓﺇﻠﻰﻋﻧﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻮ ﻠﺑﺩﺀ ﺍﻠﺗﺙﻐﻴﻝ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻠﻮﻘﺖﺍﻠﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪.٤‬ﻹﺨﻔﺎﺀﺍﻠﺸﺎﺸﺔ‪،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻠﺯ ‪ INFO‬ﻣﺭﺓﺃﺨﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﯿﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻝ ﺍﻠﺗﺷﻐﻴﻝ‬
‫ﻠﻠﻮﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻠﻰﺍﻠﻌﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻠﻄﻠﻮﺐ ﻘﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﻮﺪﺃﻜﺛﺯﻤﻥ ﻗﺭﺺ‪.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺴﺑﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻘﻲﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻮﺤﻮﺩﺃ ﻜﺗﺮﻣﻥ ﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻠﻰﻗﺯﺺ‪ ،DVD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻠﺘﻌﺭﻒﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺍﺿﺑﻃﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺪﺧﻝ ﺍﻠﻔﻴﺪﻴﻭ ﺍﻠﺼﺣﻴﺢ ﺒﺎﻠﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ TV/VIDEO‬ﺑﻭ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺣﻛﻢ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺼﺔ ﺒﺎﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻠﺔ ﺗﻭ ﺼﻴﻝ ﻨﻆﺎﻢ ﺽﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻢ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻀﺒﻂﻪ ﻋﻠﻰﺪﺧﻝ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺍﻠﺼﺣﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻇﻢ ﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻔﻲ ﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﺤﺗﻰﻋﻴﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻠﻌﺛﻮﺭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻤﺤﺭﺩ )ﺗﺜﺑﻪﺍﻠﻮﺍﺪﺍﻠﺴﺟﻠﺔﺍﺪﺍﻠﺴﺠﻠﺔﻠﻰﻗﺭﺼﺻﻮﺖﻤﻀﻐﻮﻄ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺘﻭ ﺼﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻣﺷﻐﻝ‪ ،‬ﺘﻅﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭ ﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﺿﻐﻄ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ POWER‬ﺍﻠﺣﺎﺹ ﺒﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻗﺮ ﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺪﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺮﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺎﻠﻠﻐﺎﺕ ‪،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺮ †‪، π/‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺰﺮ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫)ﺘﻅﻬﺮ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻠﺷﺎ ﺷﺔ ﻔﻘﻃ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺘﻭﺼﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﻠﻠﻣﺮ ﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻠﻰ‪ (.‬ﺇﺬﺍ ﻠﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻀﺑﻄ ﺷﺎﺸﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻠﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻀﺑﻄ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻠﺴﺑﺐ‪ ،‬ﺘﺄﻜﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺮ ﺍﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺮ ﺍﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺧﺪ ﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺠﺭﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺮﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻴﻤﻛﻨﻚ ﺘﻐﻳﻳﺮﻫﺎﺒﺎﻠﺿﻐﻄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺰﺮ ‪■ /‬‬
‫ﺒﺎﻠﻠﻭ ﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻠﻠﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻠﻤﺪﺓ ﺘﺯﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻩ ﺛﻭﺍﻦﻤﻊﻮ ﺟﻭﺪ ﺍﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﻭﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻴﻅﻬﺮﺇﻂﺎﺮ ‪ SELECT MENU LANGUAGE‬ﻤﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺣﺩﺍ ﻡ ﻮ ﻅﻳﻔﺘﻲ ﺍﻠﺒﺤﺖ ﻮﺍ ﻠﺛﺨﻂﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀﺍﻠﺗﺸﻐﻳﻞﻋﻛﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺙ ﺒﺳﺭ ﻋﺓ ﺧﻼ ﻞ ﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺪ ﺓ ﻤﺳﺠﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍ ﺴﺘﺧﺮ ﺍ ﻡ ﻮ ﻈﻳﻔﺔ ﺍ ﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻼ ﺒﺘﻘﺎ ﻞ ﺇ ﻟﻰ ﺍ ﻟﺘﺣﺪ ﻴﺪ ﺍﻠﺘﺎ ﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍ ﻟﺒﺣﺙ ﺠﻼﻝﺃﻮ ﻤﺎﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺟﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻞ� ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯ ﺮ‪) SEARCH‬‬
‫ﺃﻮ‬
‫ﺘﺧﻁﻲﺍﻟﻮﺍﺪﺍﻟﺴﺠﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼ ﺤﻆﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺩﺍﻡ ﻮﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺪﺘﺛﻐﻴﻞﻗﺭﺺ ‪DVD/VCD/MPEG4‬‬
‫‪.١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀﻟﺘﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬ﻀﻐﻂﻋﻟﻰﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓﺍﻟﺘﺣﻜﻣﻋﻥﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫�ﻋﻜﻦ�ﺪ ﻳﺪﺍﻠﻌﻠﻮ ﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻘﺎﺌﻣﺔﺍﻟﻮ ﻆﺎﺌﻒ ﺑﺎﻠﻀﻐﻂﻋﻟﻰﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬‫‪.٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻟﻰﺯﺮ†‪ π/‬ﻟﺘﺣﺪ ﻳﺪﺍﻠﻌﻨﺼﺭﺍﻟﻁﻟﻮﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻧﺪ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺭ ﺼﻦ ‪ ،VCD‬ﻗﺩﻻﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻓﺔ ‪ Disc menu‬ﻭﻓﻘًﺎﻠﻟﻘﺮﺺ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫أدﺧﻞ واﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أزرار ®‪ √/‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮل إﻟﻰ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ‪ ،‬واﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮض ‪ EZ‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺘﺄﺷﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻠﻺﺸﺎﺮﺓ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺻﻮﺗﻳﺔ ﻠﻠﻔﻳﻠﻢ‪.‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪،‬ﻳﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺴﺟﻠﺔ ﻔﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪.English 5.1CH‬ﻋﻳﻜﻥﺃﻥ ﻴﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺭﺹ‪DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺘﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺩﺼﻮﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺟﻠﺔ ﻣﺤﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻠﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻮﻇﻴﻓﺔ ‪ Bookmark‬ﺃﻮ ‪ Angle‬ﺍﻠﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ‪.‬ﺑﻌﺽﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻬﺎﻮﻆﺎﺋﻒ ﺯﺍﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻜﺛﺭﺑﻛﺛﻳﺭﻣﻣﺎﻔﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺼﻮﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺺ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻮ ﴿ﻮﻈﻳﻔﺔ ‪.﴾Menu off‬ﺘﺴﺘﺨﺩﻡﺍﻠﻮﻈﻴﻔﺔ ‪﴿ EZ View‬ﻋﺭﺽ‪ ﴾EZ‬ﻟﻐﻳﻳﺭﻨﺴﺑﺔﺍﻠﻌﺭ‬
‫ﺾﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﻉ ﺑﺎﻠﻗﺭﺺ ‪ DVD‬ﺘﺴﺘﺨﺩﻡ ﺍﻠﻮﻈﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Zoom‬ﻟﻐﻳﻳﺭﻨﺴﺑﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﺭ ﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻭﺮﺓ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎﺀ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻘﺭﺹ‪ DVD‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Title Menu / Disc Menu‬ﺒﻮﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2X, 4X, 64X, 128X‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪4X, 8X‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫‪2X, 4X, 8X‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫ﺃﻮ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀﺪ ﺘﺛﻔﻳﻞ‪،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺯﺮ ‪SKIP‬‬
‫ﻔﺴﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﻔﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﺘﺎ ﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻮ‬
‫ ﻋﻧﺪ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺭ ﺼﻦ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺇﺬﺍﻘﻣﺖ ﻧﺎ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﺎﻰ ﻟﺯﺮ ‪SKIP‬‬‫ﻳﻨﺘﻗﻞ ﺈﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﺼﻞ‪.‬ﺘ�ﺪﻲ ﻀﻐﻂﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻯﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻨﺘﻘﺎ ﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺒﺪﺍﻴﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﺎ ﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﺎﻰ ﻟﺯﺮ‪SKIP‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻘﺭﺹ ‪ VCD‬ﻔﻲ ﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Menu off‬ﻘﺭﺺ ﻣﻀﻐﻮ ﻂ‪،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻀﻐﻃﺕ ﻋﺎﻰ ﻟﺯﺮ‪( ) SKIP‬‬‫‪،‬ﻔﺴﻳﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﺎﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺴﺟﻟﺔ ﺍﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬ﻘﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺯﺮ ‪ ،( )SKIP‬ﻴﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺇﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺎﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬ﺘﻮﺪﻱ ﻀﻐﻃﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎ ﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﺪ ﺓ ﻤﺴﺟﻟﺔ ﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺬﺍ�ﺎﻮﺯﺕﻣﺩﺓﺍﻠﺎﺪﺓﺍﻟﺎﺪﻩﺍﺪﻘﻴﻘﺔﻋﻨﺪ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﻘﺭﺹ ‪ VCD‬ﻮﻘﻤﺕ ﻧﺎﻟﻀﻐﻃﻋﻟﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪،‬‬‫‪،‬ﻔﺳﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﺧﻠﻒ‪.‬ﻋﻘﺩﺍﺭﻩﺩﻘﺎﺋﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻔﺴﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺈﻠﻰﺍﻷﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬ﻋﻘﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﻘﺎﺋﻕ‪.‬ﺇﺬﺍ ﺿﻐﻃﺕ ﻋﻟﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺪ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺭ ﺼﻦ ‪ ،VCD‬ﻗﺩﻻﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻓﺔ ‪ Disc menu‬ﻭﻓﻘًﺎﻠﻟﻘﺮﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻠﻺﺸﺎﺮﺓﺇﻠﻰ ﻠﻐﺎﺖ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺠﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺎﺤﺑﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺗﻮﻠﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺺ‪.‬ﺴﺗﺗﻣﻛﻦ ﻣﻦﺍﺨﺗﻳﺎﺭﻠﻐﺎﺖ ﺍﻠﺘﺭﺟﻣﺔﺍ ﺍﻠﻣﺻﺎﺤﺑﺔ ﺃﻮﺇﻴﻗﺎﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻠﺸﺎﺸﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻓﺿﻝ ﺫﻠﻚ‪.‬ﻋﻳﻜﻥ ﺃﻥﻳﺤﺗﻮﺺ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺎﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺗﺭﺣﻣﺔﻣﺼﺎﺤﺑﺔ ﻤﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺪﺍﻢ ﻭﻅﻴﻓﺘﻲ ﺍﻠﺑﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻠﺘﺧﻄﻲ‬
‫( ﺒﻮﺤﺮﺓﺍﻠﺘﺤﻜﻡﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻠﻤﺩﺓ ﺘﺯﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼ ﺤﻆﺔ‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﺜﺧﻳﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺳﺮﻋﺔﺍﻜﺑﻳﺑﺔ ﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻮ ﻅﻴﻔﺔﻋﻦ ﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻞ ﺍﻠﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪-‬ﻻﻴﺼﺪﺮﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺖ ﺃﺛﻧﺎﺀﻮﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺚ‪).‬ﺑﺎﺴﺘﺛﻧﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﻟﻐﻌﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺘﺎﺧﺔ ﺘﺸﻔﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻤﻥﺍﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻠﻄﻠﻮﺐ‪.‬ﻳﺑﺟﺏ ﺇﺪ ﺨﺎﻝ ﻮﻗﺕ ﺍﻠﺑﺩﺀ ﻜﻤﺮﺠﻊ‪.‬ﻻﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺤﺚﻋﻥ ﺍﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼ ﺤﻆﺔ‬
‫ ﻗﺩﻻ ﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻓﺔ ‪ Title Menu / Disc menu‬ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻠﻟﻘﺮﺺ‪.‬‬‫ ﻜﺬﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻋﻴﻛﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺗﺨﺩ ﺍﻡ ﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻘﺮﺍﺺ‪،‬ﺒﺎﺴﺗﺨﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺮ ‪ DISC MENU‬ﺒﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﻟﺗﺣﻜﻡﻋﻦ ﺒُﻌﺩ ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻋﻧﺪ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺭ ﺼﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩﻻ ﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻓﺔ ‪ Disc menu‬ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻠﻟﻘﺮﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﻛﺭﺍﺭﺍﻠﺗﺸﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺗﻳﻊ ﺘﻛﺭﺍﺭﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻤﺎﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﻔﺼﻝ ﺃﻮ ﺍﻠﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﻠﻲ ﺃﻮﻘﺴﻡ ﻣﺨﺗﺎﺭ ﴿‪ ﴾A-B‬ﺃﻭﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ ﺑﺂﻛﻣﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﺗﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺭ‪DVD/VCD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮﻳﻥ ﻠﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Chapter‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Title‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،A-B‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ ﻳﻜﺮﻗﺭﺺ ‪DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝﺤﺳﺏﺍﻠﻓﺻﻝﺃﻮﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥﻭﺗﻜﺮﺭﺃﻘﺭﺍﺺ‬‫‪ VCD‬ﺍﻠﺜﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺤﺳﺏﺍﻟﻘﺭﺺﺃﻭﺍﻠﻣﺎﺪﺓﺍﻟﻣﺴﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺒﺎﺐ ‪:‬ﻠﺗﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﻠﻓﺻﻝﺍﻠﺤﺎﺮﻱﺘﺸﻐﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺻﻙ ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻛﺭﺍﺭﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥﺍﻠﺤﺎﺮﻱﺘﺸﻐﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻠﺪﺳﻙ ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻜﺭﻠﻗﺮﺹﺍﻟﺣﺎﺮﻱﺘﺸﻐﻳﻟﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻴﻓﺎﻑ ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓﺍﻟﻤﺳﺠﻟﺔﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﻱﺗﺸﻐﻳﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺧﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻆﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺭﺍﺭ‪A-B‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﻋﻧﺪ ﺍﻠﻨﻗﻄﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﺮﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺀﺘﻛﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﴿‪﴾A‬ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬ﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺳﺰ ‪ B‬ﺘﻠﻘﺎﺌﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﻋﻧﺪ ﺍﻠﻨﻗﻄﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﺮﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺀﺘﻛﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﴿‪﴾B‬ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻌﺎدي‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ زر إﻋﺎدة أ‪-‬ب )‪ (REPEAT A-B‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺮض اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺮﺳﺎﻠﺔ ﺗﻛﺮﺍﺮ� ﺇﻴﻘﺎﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻳﻞ )‪.(Repeat� Off‬‬
‫ﻣﻼ ﺤﻆﺔ‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻭﻅﻴﻓﺔ ‪ A-B REPEAT‬ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻠﻨﻗﻄﺔ )‪ (B‬ﺤﺗﻰ ﺍﻧﻗﻀﺎﺀ ‪ ٥‬ﺜﻭﺍﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻠﺗﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﺒﻌﺪ ﺿﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻗﻄﺔ )‪.(A‬‬‫ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻗﺮﺺ ‪،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎﻻ ﺘﻌﻣﻞ ﻮﻈﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Repeat‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻋﻧﺪ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺭ ﺼﻦ ‪ ،VCD‬ﻗﺩﻻﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻓﺔ ‪ Disc menu‬ﻭﻓﻘًﺎﻠﻟﻘﺮﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺼﻒﻮﻅﻴﻔﺔ ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫ﻠﻭﻆﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫)‬
‫‪Skip‬‬
‫ﺃﻮ‬
‫‪Search‬‬
‫ﺃﻮ‬
‫)‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻝﺑﺎﻠﺣﺮﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻠﺑﻃﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻭﺼﻒ‬
‫(‬
‫(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎ ﺀ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ‪,‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻘﻭﻢﺑﺎﻲﺘﻘﺪﻢﻠﻸﻤﺎﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺮﺠﻭ ﻉ‬
‫ﻠﻠﺧﻠﻒ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺮ ‪ 5‬ﺪﻗﺎﺌﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻮ‬
‫ﺃﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ‪،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺰﺮ ‪SEARCH‬‬
‫( ﻭ ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻤﺮ ﺓً ﺃﺧﺮ ﻯ ﻠﻠﺒﺣﺚ‬
‫ﺃﻮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ )‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮ ﻋﺔ ﺃﻜﺑﺮ‪ .‬ﻴﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻠﺒﺣﺚ ﺑﺴﺮ ﻋﺔ ﺃﻜﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻤﻠﻒ )‪AVI.(٨X, ٤X,٢X‬‬
‫ﻴﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻠﺒﺣﺚ ﺑﺴﺮ ﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻠﻒ ‪AVI.‬‬
‫)‪(١/١٦,١/٨X,١/٤X,١/٢X‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻠﻭﻅﺎﺌﻒﻭﺫﻠﻚ ﺣﺴﺏ ﻤﻠﻒ ‪.MPEG4‬‬‫ﻤﻠﻑ ‪ AVI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪CD-R‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻤﻜﺎﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻀﻐﻄ ﺍﻠﻔﻳﺪﻴﻮ ﺍﻠﺘﺎﻠﻴﺔ ﺪﺍﺧﻝ ﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻠﻤﺎﻒ ‪: AVI‬‬
‫ ﻤﺣﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ ‪DivX 3.11‬‬‫ ﻤﺣﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ ‪) DivX 4‬ﺣﺴﺐ ‪(MPEG-4 Simple Profile‬‬‫ ﻤﺣﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ ‪) DivX 5‬ﺍﻠﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﺒﺴﻴﻄ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺹ ﺏ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻠﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎ ﻓﻴﺔ ﻤﺜﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺮ ﺍﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎ ﻫﺎﺕ ‪.‬ﻜﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢﺪﻋﻢ ‪ Qpel‬ﻮ ‪ GMC‬ﺃﻴﻀًﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫ ﻤﺣﺘﻭ ﻴﺎﺕ ‪ Xvid‬ﻤﺘﻭ ﺍﻓﻗﺔ ﻤﻊ ‪.MPEG-4‬‬‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD-RW & DVD+R‬ﺍﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻠﺬﻱ ﻴﺪﻋﻢ ‪:DivX‬‬
‫ ﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﻷ ﺴﺎ ﺴﻲ ‪DivX3.11/4.12/5.x‬‬‫‪) Xvid‬ﺑﺮﻨﺎﻤﺞ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﻭ ﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ (MPEG-4‬ﻮ ‪DivX Pro‬‬
‫ ﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻠﻣﻠﻒ ‪*.avi, *.div, *.divx. :‬ﻴﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻠﺟﺎﺰ ﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺪﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺪﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻌﺭ ﻭ ﻀﺔ ﺃﺪﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪DivX5‬‬
‫‪ ٤٨٠ x ٧٢٠‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭًﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٧٦ x ٧٢٠‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭًﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺃﺼﻰ ﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﺎﺕ‪ ٤:‬ﻤﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻴﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻇﺔ‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺮ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺆ ﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺑﻴﻭ ﺘﺮﺸﺧﺼﻲ‪.‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻴﻔﺴﺮﺳﺑﺐﻋﺪﻢ ﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻔﻴﺮ‬‫ﻮﺍﻹﺼﺪ ﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻠﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻷ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺓ ﻠﻠﻤﻮ ﺍﺼﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻴﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻠﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-R/RW‬ﺍﻠﻤﻜﺘﻭ ﺑﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ MPEG4‬ﻮ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻭ ﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ "‪."ISO9660‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺖ ﺍﻠﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﻤﻳﺯﺓ ﻤﺿﻴﻒ ‪USB‬‬
‫)ﻔﻗﻄ ‪(DVD-C450K, C450, C360‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻇﺔ‬
‫ ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻜﻝ ﻤﺮ ﺓ ﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻠﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺮ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺘﺣﻛﻢ ‪،‬ﺴﻭﻒ ﻴﻆﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺮ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬‫ ﻴﻅﻬﺮ ﺍﻻ ﺧﺘﺼﺎﺮ "‪ "USB‬ﻋﻠﻰﺷﺎ ﺷﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ دي ﻓﻲ دي أو ﺳﻲ دي أﺛﻨﺎء وﺟﻮد ‪، USB‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮرﺳﺎﻠﺔ “اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ USB‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎراﻷداة“ أﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻤﺪة ﻟﺤﻈﺔ‬‫ ﺘﻆﻬﺮ ﺍﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪) USB MENU‬ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ‪ (USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻴﺘﻡ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻠﻣﺣﻔﻭ ﻇ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﺤﻭ ﺁﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺘﻓﺎﺩﻱ ﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻠﺫﺍﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻠﻤﺧﺰﻨﺔ ﺑﻭﺤﺪﺓ ‪ ،USB‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯ ﺍﻠﺔ ﺁﻤﻨﺔ ﻘﺑﻞ ﻔﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻠﺯﺮ)■( ‪) STOP‬ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ ﺃﺯﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪.USB‬‬‫ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻠﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ) ‪( /‬‬
‫ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻭﺠﻭﺪ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻤﻦ ﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺘﺤﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻠﺗﺎﻠﻲﻋﻧﺪ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ‬‫ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻤﻦ ﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻢ ﺘﺤﺪﻴﺪ ﺍﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻠﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﻋﻧﺪ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ‬‫ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻠﺴﺭﻴﻊ‬
‫ﻠﺗﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻠﻘﺮﺺ ﺒﺴﺮ ﻋﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ﺃﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ) ‪( /‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻜﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻃ ﻌﻠﻰ ﺃﻱﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﺯﺮﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻳﺭ ﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻜﻣﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪) ٢x‬ﺑﻣﻌﺪﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻥ( ‪) ٤xo‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪٤x‬ﻤﺮﺍﺖ( ‪) ٨xo‬ﺑﻤﻌﺩﻞ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺖ(‬
‫ﺍﻷ ﺠﻬﺮﺓ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﻭ ﺍﻓﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻭﺤﺪﺍﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﺩﻋﻢ‪) USB Mass Storage V1.0.‬ﻭﺤﺩﺍﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻠﺗﻲ ﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻜﻗﺮﺺ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻠﻺﺯ ﺍﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻆﺎﻢ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬
‫)ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 2000‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺼﺪﺍﺮ ﺍﻷﺤﺪﺚ( ﺑﺪﻭﻦ ﺘﺛﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻨﺎﻣﺞ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ : MP3‬ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ‪ MP3‬ﻤﻦ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻠﻔﻼﺶ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺺ ﺍﻠﺼﻠﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻠﻛﺎﻤﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻠﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻠﻛﺎ ﻣﻴﺭﺍﺖ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻢ ﻭﺤﺩﺍﺖ ‪.USB Mass Storage 1.0‬‬
‫ ﺍﻠﻛﺎﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺖ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻠﻺﺰﺍﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻇﺎﻢ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬‫)ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺮ ‪ 2000‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺮ ﺍﻷﺤﺩﺚ( ﺑﺪﻭﻦ ﺘﺛﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻣﺤﺭﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺺ ﻓﻼﺶ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻣﺭﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺺ ﺍﻠﺼﻠﺑﺔ ‪ : USB‬ﺍﻻﺠﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﺩﻋﻡ ‪ USB2.0‬ﺍﻭ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﺘﺟﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻔﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺠﻭﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻧﺪ ﺗﻭﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.USB1.1‬‬‫ ﺒﺎﻠﻨﺴﺑﺔ ﻠﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺺ ﺍﻠﺼﻠﺑﺔ‪ ،USB‬ﺘﺎﻛﺪ ﻤﻥ ﺘﻭﺼﻴﻞ ﺴﻟﻠﻚﺘﻳﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬‫ﺑﻤﺤﺭﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺺ ﺍﻠﺼﻠﺑﺔ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻧﺤﻭ ﺴﻠﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ : USB‬ﻗﺎﺮﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺫﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻗﺎﺮﺉ ‪ USB‬ﻤﺗﻌﺩﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺖ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻭﺼﻳﻝ ‪ ، USB‬ﻗﺪﻻ ﺘﻢ ﺍﻠﺘﻌﺭﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ ‪ CBI‬ﻏﻳﺮ ﻤﺩﻋﻭﻡ )ﺘﺤﻛﻢ‪/‬ﺘﺿﺨﻳﻡ‪/‬ﻗﻄﻊ(‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﺃﻳﻀًﺎﺍﻠﻛﺎﻤﻴﺭﺍﺖ ﺍﻠﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﺘﺨﺩﻡﺑﺭﻭﺘﻭﻛﻭﻝ ‪ PTP‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺏ ﺘﺛﺑﻳﺖ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻧﺪ ﺘﻭ ﺻﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻠﻜﻤﺑﻴﻭﺘﺭ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺩﻋﻭﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻭﻻ ﺘﻴﻢ ﺩﻋﻢﺍﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻴﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻨﻅﺎﻡ ﻤﻠﻒ ‪.NTFS‬‬‫)ﻳﺘﻡ ﻓﻗﻄ ﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻆﺎﻢ ﻤﻠﻒ ‪)32/16 FAT‬ﺠﺪﻭﻞ ﺘﻭﻴﻊ ﺍﻠﻣﺎﻒ‪.(32/16‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺪﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻤﺸﻐﻼﺖ ‪ MP3‬ﻋﻧﺪ ﺘﻭ ﺻﻴﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺫ ﺍﻠﻣﻧﺘﺞ ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﺘﻣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺤﺟﻢ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻨﻈﺎﻢ ﺍﻠﻣﻟﻓﺎﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻛﻭﻦ ﻭﻅﻳﻓﺔ ‪ USB HOST‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻤﺪﻋﻭﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﺘﻭﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻧﺘﺞ ﺍﻠﺫﻱ ﻳﻗﻭﻢ ﺑﻧﻗﻞ ﻣﻠﻓﺎﺖ ﺍﻠﻭﺴﺎﺋﻄ‬‫ ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻠﺗﺷﻐﻴﻞﻤﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪) MPT‬ﺑﺭﻭﺘﻭﻞ ﻧﻗﻞ ﺍﻠﻭﺴﺎﺋﻄ( ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﻣﻛﻦ ‪.Janus‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻭﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻟﻭﻣﺎﺖ ﺤﻭﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻠﻣﺪﻋﻭﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻨﻅﺮ ﺼﻓﺤﺔ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻴﻣﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻤﺘﺎ ﻉ ﺑﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻭﺴﺎﺌﻃ ﻤﺛﻝ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺮﻭ ﺎﻷﻓﻼﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻠﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﺤﻔﻭ ﻆﺔ ﺑﻣﺸﻐﻝ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﺬﺍﻜﺮ ﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻠﺮ ﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻭﺖ ﻤﺮ ﺘﻔﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻂﺮ ﻴﻖ ﺘﻭ ﺼﻴﻝ ﻭ ﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺧﺰﻴﻦ ﺒﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻠﻤﻭﺠﻭﺪ ﺑﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﻤﻴﺯ ﺓ ‪) USBHOST‬ﻤﺿﻴﻒ ‪(USB‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻭ ﺼﻴﻝ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻠﻤﻭ ﺠﻭﺪ ﺑﺎﻠﺠﺯ ﺀ ﺍﻷﻤﺎ ﻤﻲ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﻭ ﺤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻠﺯﺮ ﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ‪. USB‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﻤﻭﺍﻓﻖ( ﻠﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻠﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻤﺴﺢ ﻋﻼﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻤﻠﻒ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﺑﻗﺮﺺ ‪CD-R‬‬
‫‪. ٣-١‬ﺘﺗﻤﺎﺜﻞ ﺍﻠﺧﻄﻭﺍﺖ ﻣﻦ‪ ٣-١‬ﻤﻊ ﺗﻠﻚﺍﻠﻭﺍﺮﺪﺓ ﻔﻲ "ﺍﺴﺧﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ﻠﻌﻼﻤﺎﺖ"‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻳﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺗﺤﺩﻴﺪ ﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻠﻌﻼﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻄﻠﻭﺐ ﺤﺫﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ CANCEL‬ﻠﺗﺤﺩﻴﺪ ﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻠﻌﻼﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻄﻠﻭﺐ ﺤﺫﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻤﻠﻓﺎﺖ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ WMA‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺭﺹ ‪, CD-R‬ﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻠﺮﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ ﻴﺠﺐ ﺃﻦ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ WMA‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ISO 9660‬ﺃﻭ ‪.JOLIET‬‬‫ﻴﺘﻭ ﺍﻔﻕ ﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ISO‬ﻭ ‪ Joliet‬ﻠﻣﻠﻔﺎﺖ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ WMA‬ﻣﻊﻧﻅﺎﻢ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Microsoft DOS‬ﻭ ‪Microsoft Windows‬‬
‫ﻭﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ‪. Apple Mac‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻜﺜﺭ ﺍﺴﺗﺧﺪﺍﻣﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﻭ ﻆﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻜﺑﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻠﺘﺼﻐﻳﺮ‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺗﺴﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺖ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ، WMA‬ﻴﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻴﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻻﺴﻢ ‪ ٨‬ﺤﺭﻭﻒ ﻭﻴﺠﺏ‬‫ﺇﺪﺨﺎﻝ ”‪ mp3‬ﻭ ‪ “wma.‬ﻛﺎﻣﺗﺪﺍﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﻧﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻠﻌﺎﻡ ﻠﻼﺴﻢ ‪ Title.Mp3 :‬ﺃﻭ ‪. Title.WMA‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺘﻜﻭﻴﻦ ﺍﻠﻌﻨﻭﺍﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻤﻥ ﺍﺴﺗﺧﺪﺍﻢ ‪ ٨‬ﺤﺭﻭﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻤﺴﺎﻔﺎﺖ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻻﺴﻡ ﻭﺘﺠﻧﺐ ﺴﺗﺨﺩﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﺤﺭﻭﻒ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺼﺔ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻔﻲ ﺬﻠﻙ‪.(+,=,\,/,.) :‬‬
‫ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢﻭ ﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻜﺑﻴﺭ )‪)(DVD/VCD‬ﻔﻗﻄ ‪(DVD-C350, C350K‬‬‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ﺰﻭﻭﻡ )‪ (Zoom‬ﺑﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺣﻜﻢﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢﻭ ﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻜﺑﻴﺭ )‪)(DVD/VCD‬ﻔﻗﻄ ‪(DVD-C450K,C450,C360‬‬‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ INFO‬ﺑﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺣﻜﻢﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺰﺮ ﻴﻥ†‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪ ﻳﺪ ﻤﺧﺗﺻﺭ )‪(Shortcut‬‬
‫‪.٣‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺰﺭ ﻴﻦ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﺰﻭﻭﻡ )‪ (Zoom‬ﺜﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺭﺺ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺨﺸﺯ‬‫ﻠﺘﻜﺑﻴﺮ‪ No◦ ٤/٣/٢‬ﺑﺎﻠﺘﺭ ﺘﻴﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺧﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻞ ﻧﻗﻞ ﻔﻙ ﻀﻐﻄ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﻛﻳﻟﻭ ﺒﺎﻳﺕ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺪ ﺘﺳﺠﻳﻝ ﻤﻠﻓﺎﺕ ‪.MP3‬‬‫ﺘﻌﺘﻣﺩ ﺠﻭﺪﺓ ﺻﻭﺖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻲ ﻋﻠﻱ ﻤﻌﺪﻞ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻃ ‪ /‬ﻓﻚ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻃﺍﻠﻤﺤﺩﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻴﺘﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻠﺤﺼﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺖ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺖ ﺍﻠﻤﺿﻐﻭﻄ ﺘﻭﻔﺮ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﻧﺎﻈﺭﻱ ‪ /‬ﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫‪،‬ﺒﻣﺎ ﻴﻌﻧﻲ ﺍﻠﺘﺤﻭﻴﻞ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺘﻧﺴﻳﻖ ‪، MP3‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ‪ ١٢٨‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭﺑﺎﻴﺖ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺤﺗﻰ ‪ ١٦٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﺎﻴﺖ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺜﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪.‬ﺒﻴﻧﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻴﺆﺪﻱ ﺍﺨﺘﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻷ ﻋﻟﻰ ‪،‬ﻣﺛﻞ ‪ ١٩٢‬ﻛﻳﻟﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻤﺎﻳﺯﻳﺪ ‪،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻭﻞ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺠﻭﺪﺓ ﺼﻭﺕ ﺃﻔﺿﻞ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺪﺮﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ‪،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻣﻟﻓﺎﺕ ﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﻛﻳﻟﻭﺒﺎﻳﺕ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻛﻞ ﺼﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺎ ﻃﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪/MPEG4/JPEG/WMA/MP3‬ﻗﺮﺺ ﺍﻠﻣﻀﻐﻭﻃ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮ ﺍﺹ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺍﻠﻣﻀﻐﻭ ﻃﺔ ﺃﻮ ﺍﻷ ﻗﺮ ﺍﺹ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MPEG4/JPEG/WMA/MP3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻏﺎ ﻦٍ ﺧﺎﺼﺔﻮ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺮ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺘﺣﺘﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺘﻧﻅﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺟﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﻨﺣﻭ ﺍﻠﻤﻭ ﻀﺢ ﺃﺪ ﺑﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺘﺘﺸﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻂﺭ ﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﻛﻤﺑﻳﻭ ﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻠﻮ ﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺣﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﺪﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻠﺪﺮﺝ‪ .‬ﻴﺘﻢﺇ ﺍﻠﺷﺎ ﺷﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺎﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪001/004‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻴﺪ ﺍﺤﺟﻠﺪ‬
‫ﻔﺎﺌﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻌﻭﺪﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺤﺭﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻴﻣﻛﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﺠﻠﺪ ﻔﻲ ﻜﻞ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Stop‬ﺃﻭ ‪�Play‬‬
‫ ﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻠﺮﺌﻴﺴﻲ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ RETURN‬ﻠﻼﻧﺘﻗﺎﻞ ﺍﻠﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻠﺮﺌﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮﻴﻥ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ״��״ ﺜﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻜﻲ ﺘﻧﺗﻘﻞ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺠﻠﺩ ﺍﻠﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ�‬
‫ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﻗﺭﺺ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻭﻄ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮ ﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻠﻘﺭ ﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺩﺭ ﺝ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻟﻖ ﺍﻠﺪﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻨﻭﻉ ﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻄ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺍﺤﺘﻭ ﻯ ﺍﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰﻜﻝٍ ﻤﻦ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻮ ‪.WMA‬‬‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻴﺩ ﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻠﺑﺪ ﺀ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷ ﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﻭﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻌﺷﻭﺍﺌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ REPEAT‬ﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﻭﺠﺪ ﺃﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎ ﻉ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻴﻗﺎﻑ ﻮ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﻮ ﻣﺟﻟﺩ ﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻴﻗﺎﻑ ‪ :‬ﺗﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻋﺎﺪﻱ‬‫ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ ‪ :‬ﻠﺘﻜﺮﺍﺮ ﻤﻡﻒ ﺍﻷ ﻏﻨﻳﺔ ﺍﻠﺣﺎﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﺟﻟﺩ ‪ :‬ﻠﺘﻜﺮ ﺍﺮ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷ ﻏﺎﻨﻲ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻤﺘﺪ‬‫ﺍﺪ ﺑﺘﺮ ﺘﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﻠﺌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ‪ :‬ﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺖ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻨﻲ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻄﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻻﻤﺗﺪ ﺍﺪ ﺑﺘﺮﺘﻴﺐ ﻋﺷﻭ ﺍﺌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺴﺘﺌﻨﺎﻒ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻌﺎﺪﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.CANCEL‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ ﺍﺴﺗﺧﺪﻢ ﻣﻌﺪﻞ ﻔﻚ ﺿﻐﻃ ﻻ ﻴﻗﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٦٤‬ﻜﻴﻟﻭ ﺑﺎﻴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺟﻴﻞ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺖ ‪.WMA‬‬‫ﺘﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺠﻭﺪﺓ ﺻﻭﺖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺖ ‪ WMA‬ﺒﺷﻜﻞ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻞ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻃ ‪ /‬ﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻃ ﺍﻠﻤﺤﺩﺩ�‬
‫ﻴﺘﻃﻠﺏ ﺍﻠﺤﺼﻭﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺖ ﻗﺮﺺ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺖ ﺍﻠﻤﺿﻐﻭﻄ ﺘﻭﻔﺭﻣﻌﺪﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺘﻨﺎﻆﺮﻱ ‪ /‬ﺭﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻠﺘﺤﻭﻴﻞ ﺇﻠﻯ ﺗﻧﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،WMA‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻴﻗﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٦٤‬ﻛﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﺎﻴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺤﺘﻰ ‪ ١٩٢‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺑﺎﻴﺕ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻜﺛﺮ ﻤﻥ‬
‫‪ 192‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﺎﻴﺖ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺜﺎﻨﻳﺔ ﺒﺸﻜﻞ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ .‬ﻤﻌﺩﻞ ﺍﻠﻌﻳﻧﺎﺖ ﺍﻠﺬﻱ ﻴﻣﻛﻥ ﺪﻋﻣﻪ ﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺖ ‪ WMA‬ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻤﻦ ‪ 30‬ﻛﻴﻠﻭ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻﺘﺤﺎﻭﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺖ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻠﻤﺤﻣﻴﺔ ﺒﻤﻭﺠﺐ ﺤﻗﻭﻖ ﺍﻠﻄﺑﺢ ﻭﺍﻠﻨﺷﺮ‬‫ﺘﻢ ﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻠﻣﻠﻔﺎﺖ ״ﺍﻠﻤﺤﻤﻳﺔ״ ﻭﺤﻤﺎﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻠﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻠﻣﻩﻊ ﺍﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻠﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻲ�‬
‫ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺖ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻨﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ ‪) Windows Media TM :‬ﻋﻼﻤﺔ ﺘﺟﺎﺭﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻤﺴﺟﻠﺷﺮﻜﺔ ‪ (Microsoft Inc‬ﻭ ‪) SDMI TM‬ﻋﻼﻤﺔ ﺘﺠﺎﺭﻴﺔ ﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻠﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.(SDMI Foundation‬ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚﻨﺴﺦ ﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻢ‪:‬‬‫ﻻﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺮ ﺍﻠﺘﻭﺻﻴﺎﺖ ﺍﻠﻤﺫﻛﻭﺮﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺿﻤﺎﻧًﺎ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻤﺷﻐﻞ ﺃﻘﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺴﻴﻗﻭﻢ ﺑﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪ ،MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﺘﺄﻛﻴﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺠﻭﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻴﺠﺏ ﻤﻼﺤﻆﺔ ﺃﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺘﻗﻨﻴﺎﺖ ﻭﺃﺴﺎﻠﻴﺏ ﺘﺴﺠﻳﻝ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺖ ‪ MP3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺺ ‪ CD-Rs‬ﺘﻤﻨﻊﺍﻠﺗﺸﻐﻴﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻤﺛﻞ ﻠﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻤﻠﻔﺎﺖ ﺑﺎﺴﺘﺨﺪﺍﻢ ﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺭ ﺍﺺ ‪) DVD‬ﻜﺎﻨﺨﻔﺎﺾ ﺠﻭﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺖ ﻭﻋﺟﺰ ﺍﻠﻤﺷﻐﻞ ﻔﻲ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻠﻭ ﺤﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺤﺘﻰ ‪٠٠‬ە ﻤﻠﻒ ﻭ‪٠٠‬ە ﻣﺟﻠﺪ ﻜﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺻﻰﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻠﻭﺍﺤﺩ‬
‫ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫ﻭﻆﻴﻔﺔ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫ﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺩ ﺍﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ AVI‬ﺑﻐﺮﺾ ﺍﺤﺘﻭﺍﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻴﻭ ﻭﺼﻭﺕ‪.‬ﻓﻼ ﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﺴﻭ ﻯ ﺍﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺒﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ AVI‬ﻓﻘﻄ ﺬﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻤﺘﺪﺍﺪ "‪."avi.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮ ﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻠﻘﺭ ﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺩﺭ ﺝ‪.‬ﺃﻏﻟﻖ ﺍﻠﺪﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻟﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﻤﻠﻒ ‪، (DivX/XviD) avi‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺘﻜﺮﺍﺮ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ REPEAT‬ﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻚﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻭﻀﺎﻉ ‪،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻤﺳﺎﺭ )‪ (Track‬ﻭ ﻤﺟﻟﺩ )‪ (Folder‬ﻭ ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻑ )‪.(Off‬‬
‫ ﻤﺳﺎﺭ )‪ : (Track‬ﻠﺘﻜﺭﺍﺮ ﺍﻠﻌﻨﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻠﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻤﺟﻟﺩ )‪ : (Folder‬ﻠﺘﻜﺭﺍﺮﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ AVI‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻤﺘﺪﺍﺪ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﻣﺎﺜﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻠﺣﺎﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻑ )‪(Off‬‬
‫ﺘﻐﻳﻴﺭﻗﺎﺌﻣﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺘﺘﻴﺡ ﻠﻚ ﺍﻠﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ‪ Setup‬ﺘﺧﺼﻴﺹ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻦ ﻄﺭﻴﻖ ﺍﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺒﺘﺣﻳﺪ ﺘﻔﺿﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻠﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺧﺘﻠﻔﺔﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﺮ ﺌﻴﺴﻲ ‪،‬ﺑﻝ ﻭﻀﺑﻄ ﺍﻠﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻭ‬
‫ﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺯ ﻴﻭﻦ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻭ ﻔﺮﺓ ﻠﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺒﻭ ﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺴﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺮﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ‪ ، Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ † ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ†‪ π/‬ﻠﻠﻮﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻣﻴﺯ ﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ ENTER‬ﻠﻠﻭ ﺼﻭﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻣﻳﺯ ﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﻔﺮ ﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻹﺨﻔﺎ ﺀ ﻋﺮ ﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹ ﻋﺪﺍﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺠﺮ ﺍﺀ ﺍﻹ ﻋﺪﺍﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻣﺮﺓً ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻇﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻠﻗﺭ ﺺ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺕﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ‪.Setup‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻤﻳﺯﺍﺕﺍﻠﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺬﺍ ﺘﻢ ﺿﺑﻄ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺷﻐﻝﻭ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺺﻭﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﺼﻮ ﺕ ﻭ ﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺭ ﺠﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺎ ﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺒﺷﻜﻝ ﻤﺴﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺘﻆﻬﺭ ﺠﻣﻴﻌًﺎ ﺑﺷﻜﻝ ﺘﻠﻗﺎﺌﻲ ﻔﻲ ﻜﻝ ﻤﺮ ﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺮ ﺽ ﻔﻴﺎﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺪ ﺍﻢ ﻠﻐﺔ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺷﻐﻝ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯ ﺭﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻟﻐﺔ ﺼﻓﻗﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ † ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ . ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﻄﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻴﺘﻢ ﺘﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻠﻐﺔ ﻭ ﺘﻌﻭ ﺪ ﺍﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺌﻣﺔ ‪.Language Setup‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻋﺭﺾﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.Menu‬‬
‫ﺇﺬﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻠﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺳﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺹ ‪ ،‬ﻔﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺍﻠﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﻤﺳﺑﻗﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺤﺪﺪ "‪ "Original‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﻨﺖ ﺘﺭﻴﺪ ﻀﺑﻂ ﺍﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻀﻴﺔ ﻠﻣﺎﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺣﻴﺚ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻠﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻷ ﺼﺎﻴﺔ ﻠﺘﺴﺟﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻗﺭ ﺹ‬
‫ﺤﺪﺪ "‪ "Automatic‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﻨﺖ ﺘﺭﻴﺪ ﻀﺑﻂ ﺍﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺎﺣﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻔﺲ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺘﺷﻤﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺭ ﺍﺺ ﺍﻠﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﻢ ﺘﺣﺪ ﻳﺪ ﻫﺎ ﻜﻠﻐﺔ ﺃﻭﻠﻰ ‪،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺹ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺪ ﺍﻠﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﺼﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺘﺘﻴﺢ ﻠﻠﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺪ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺕ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺤﺴﺐ ﻨﻅﺎﻢ ﺍﻠﺼﻭ ﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﺴﺘﺧﺪﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯ ﺭﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻭﺪﻳﻭ ﺻﻓﻗﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ † ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺮ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻠﻮﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﻌﺮﺾ‬
‫ﺘﺘﻴﺢ ﻠﻚ ﺧﻳﺎﺮ ﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﻌﺮ ﺽ ﺿﺑﻃ ﻭ ﻆﺎ ﺌﻑ ﺍﻠﻔﻳﺪﻴﻭ ﺍﻠﻣﺧﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻠﻠﻣﺷﻐﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬
‫‪ . ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻓﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ † ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ . ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺮ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻠﻮﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺮﺠﻊ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺪﻠﻳﻝ ﻤﺴﺘﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﻠﻠﺘﻌﺮ ﻒ ﻋﻰ ﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺯ ﻴﻭﻦ ﻴﺪ ﻋﻢ ﺍﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻘﺪﻢ ﺃﻢ ﻻ ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻦ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺯ ﻴﻭﻦ ﻴﺪ ﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻌﺮ ﺍﺾ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻗﺪﻢ‪ ،‬ﻔﺎﺘﺑﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻭﺍﺭﺪﺓ ﻔﻲ ﺪﻠﻴﻝ ﻤﺴﺘﺠﺪﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺯ ﻴﻭﻦ ﻔﻤﺎ ﻴﺘﻠﻖﻴﺎﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻌﺭ ﺍﺾ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻗﺪﻢ ﻔﻲ ﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻨﻅﺎﻢ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺯﻴﻮﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻔﻴ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻀﺑﻃ ‪ Video Output‬ﺑﻃﺮﻴﻘﺔ ﻏﻳﺮ ﺼﺣﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻘﺪ ﻻﺘﻆﻬﺭ ﺍﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩ ﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻵﺒﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺘﻤﻝ ﻭﻆﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Parental Control‬ﺒﺎﻻﺷﺘﺮ ﺍﻚ ﻤﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺺ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻠﻲ ﺘﻢﺘﻌﻳﻳﻦ ﺘﺼﻨﻳﻒ ﻠﻬﺎ ﺒﺤﻳﺚ ﺘﺴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻔﻲ ﺃﻗﺮ ﺍﺺ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﺷﺎ ﻫﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻷ ﺴﺭ ﺓ‪ .‬ﻴﻭ ﺠﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻴﺼﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﺴﺘﻭ ﻴﺎﺕ ﺘﺼﻨﻳﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻘﺮ ﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻭ ﻯ ﺍﻠﺘﺼﻨﻳﻑ ‪ /‬ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻜﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯ ﺭﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻠﺪﻳﻥ ﺻﻓﻗﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ † ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯ ﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﻜﻟﻣﺔﺳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻠﺪﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻂ ® ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ†‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺤﺪﻴﺪ ‪ Rating Level‬ﺍﻠﻣﻃﻠﻭﺐ ‪ ® ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ .ENTER‬ﻤﺛﺎﻝ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﻭﻀﻊ ﺃﻣﻥﺍﻟﻄﻓﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﻠﺮ ﺠﺍﺀ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﺴﺮ‪ ،‬أدﺧﻞ إذا آﺎﻧﺖ هﺬﻩ هﻲ اﻟﻤﺮة اﻷوﻟﻰ ‪ ، 0000‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ آﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻜﻮن آﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور‬
‫ﻋﺪدا ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ 0000‬ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻷﺑﻮي ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺪﺨﺎﻝ ﻜﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻠﺠﺪﻴﺪﺓ ﻤﺠﺪﺌﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻇﺔ‬
‫ ﺃﻣﻥﺍﻟﻄﻓﻝ‬‫ ‪) G‬ﺍﻠﺠﻤﻬﻮﺮ ﺍﻠﻌﺎﻢ(‪ :‬ﺠﻣﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﺮ ﺍﻠﻤﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ‪) PG‬ﺍﻠﺘﻭ ﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻷ ﺒﻭ ﻱ ﺍﻠﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ(‪ :‬ﺍﻠﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺟﻭﺪ ﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻠﻣﻭ ﺍﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻠﻣﻼﺌﻤﺔ ﻠﻸﻄﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ‪) 13-PG‬ﺘﺣﺬﻴﺮ ﺍﻵ ﺒﺎ ﺀ ﺒﺸﺪﺓ(‪ :‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻠﻤﺣﺘﻤﻝ ﻭﺠﻭﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻠﻣﻭ ﺍﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻠﻤﻼﺌﻣﺔ ﻠﻸ ﻄﻔﺎﻝ ﺘﺣﺕ ﺴﻥ ‪.13‬‬‫ ‪) PGR‬ﺍﻠﺘﻭ ﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﺑﻮ ﻱ ﺍﻠﻤﻘﺘﺮ ﺡ(‪ :‬ﻠﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻠﺿﺮﻭﺮ ﺓ ﻋﺪﻢ ﻤﻼﺀﻣﺘﻬﺎ‬‫ﻠﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﻡ ﻛﻤﻥ ﺍﻠﻭ ﺍﺟﺐ ﺘﺣﻔُﻅ ﺍﻠﻤﺸﺎ ﻫﺪﻭﻤﺮ ﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻵﺑﺎﺀﻭﺍﻷﻮﺼﻴﺎﺀ ﻠﻠﻤﺷﺎﻫﺪﻴﻦ ﺍﻠﺼﻐﺎﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪) R‬ﻤﺣﻆﻭﺮ( ‪ :‬ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﻤﻔﺘﺮ ﺾ ﻭﺟﻭﺪ ﺼﺤﺑﺔ ﻠﻠﻤﺷﺎﻫﺪﻴﻦ ﺘﺣﺕ ﺴﻦ ‪.17‬‬‫ )‪ : NC 17 (NC 17‬ﻻ ﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻠﺳﻣﺎ ﺡ ﻷﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻦ ‪ 17‬ﻓﺄﻗﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺷﺩ‬‫‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻨﺴﻴﺕ ﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻠﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺑﻚ ‪ ،‬ﻔﺎﻨﻆﺮﻨﺴﻴﺎﻦ ﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲﺪﻠﻴﻝ ﺍﺴﺘﻜﺸﺎﻒﺍﻷﺨﻃﺎﺀﻭﺇﺼﻼﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻇﺔ‬
‫ﺤﺘ ﺃﺛﻧﺎ ﺀ ﻀﺒﻄ ‪ PCM Down Sampling‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.off‬‬
‫ ﺴﺘﻗﻭﻢ ﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮ ﺍﺺ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻠﺼﻭ ﺖ ﺬﻱ ﺍﻠﻣﻌﺎﻴﻧﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﻨﺧﻓﺿﺔ ﻓﻘﻄ ﻣﻦﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺧﺭ ﺝ ﺍﻠﺮ ﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺨﺭﺝ ﺼﻭﺕﺘﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻘﺭﺹ ﺼﻭﺕ ‪.DTS‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬
‫‪ . ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ‪ DivX‬ﺻﻓﻗﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ † ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ . ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺮ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻠﻮﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺘﻢ ﺍﻠﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﻤﻭ ﺟﺐ ﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺹ ﻣﻦ ‪ "Dolby".Dolby Laboratories‬ﻭﺭﻤﺯ ﺣﺮ ﻒ ‪ D‬ﺍﻠﻣﺯ ﻭﺪ ﺝ ﻳﻤﺛﻼﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻠ ‪ " DTS".Dolby Laboratories‬ﻭ "‪ "DTS Digital Out‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻦ ﺘﺠﺎﺮ ﻳﺘﺎﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻦ‬
‫‪.Digital Theater System, Inc‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻠﻤُﺪ ﻣَﺞ‬
‫)ﻔﻗﻄ ‪(DVD-C450K,C450, C360‬‬
‫ﺘﺘﻴﺢ ﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﺓ ﻨﺴﺦ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﻘﺭ ﺹ ﺇﻠﻰﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺒﺘﻧﺴﻴﻖ ‪.MP3‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻔﺘﺢ ﺪﺮﺝ ﺍﻠﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻠﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺘﻲ )‪ (CD DA‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺪﺮﺝ ﺜﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺒﺈﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺒﺘﻭ ﺼﻴﻝ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻠﻰ ﻤﻀﻴﻒ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻤﻘﺪﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺷﻐﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ ENTER‬ﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻨﺪﻤﺎ ﺘﻛﻭﻦ ﺍﻠﻭ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭ ﻀﻊ ﺍﻹﻴﻘﺎﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪) RETURN‬ﻋﻭﺪﺓ( ﻠﻌﺮﺾ ﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Ripping‬ﺍﻨﺳﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺭ ﺍﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺮ†‪ π/‬ﻻ ﺧﺘﻳﺎﺭ ‪” SELECT‬ﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ”‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﺠﻤﻳﻊ ﺍﻠﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻠﻧﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻹﻠﻐﺎﺀ ﺘﺤﺪﻴﺪ ﻨﺴﺦ ﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ ENTER‬ﻤﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ® ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ‪) START‬ﺒﺪﺀ( ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻧﺳﺦ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺘﺣﺘﻭ ﻱ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺯﺮﺍﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﺿﻊ )ﺴﺭ ﻳﻊ‪/‬ﻋﺎﺩﻴﺔ (‬‫ ﻤﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻠﺒﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ‪ 128‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻠﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻠﻰ ‪ 192‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻠﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻮ ‪ 256‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻠﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ‪ 320‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻠﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ‪..‬‬‫ ﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﺍﻠﺠﻬﺎﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻠﻠﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻳﻦ ﺍﻷ ﺠﻬﺯ ﺓ )ﺒﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪(4‬‬‫ ﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻠﻐﺎﺀ ﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ ENTER‬ﻠﻠﺘﻐﺘﻐﻳﻳﺮ ﻤﻦ ﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻜﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺒﻼ‪.‬‬‫ ﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻠﻨﺳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ ENTER‬ﻠﺑﺪ ﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻼﺣﻇﺔ‬
‫ ﻠﻠﻌﻮﺪﺓ ﺇﻠﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،CDDA‬ﺍﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ RETURN‬ﻣﺮ ﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻤﺎ ﺘﺘﻢ ﻤﻌﺎﻠﺠﺔ ﺍﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺺ ﺍﻠﻤﺪﻤﺞ ﺳﻭ ﻒ ﻳﺼﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻠﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﺘﻠﻘﺎﺌﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﻗﺭ ﺍﺹ ﺍﻠﻣﺪﻤﺠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻠﺼﻭ ﺘﻴﺔ )‪ (CD DA‬ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻠﻧﺴﺦ ﻤﻨﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻷﻦ ﺍﻠﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺎﺪﻝ ‪ 2.6‬ﻀﻌﻒ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﺴﺮ ﻋﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﺎﺪﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻃﻴﻊﺍﻠﻣﺴﺘﺧﺪﻢ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ‪ CDDA‬ﻤﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮ ﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﻗﺮﺺ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺮﺍﻠﻀﻐﻭﻃ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﺺ ﺑﺎﻠﺼﻭﺮ‬
‫‪ �١‬ﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻠﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻠﻄﻠﻭﺏ�‬
‫‪ �٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺤﺪﻴﺪ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻔﻲ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻗﺎﻄﻊ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪�ENTER‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻇﺔ‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺰﺭ ‪ STOP‬ﻟﻠﺮﺠﻭﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻗﺎﻄﻊ�‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﻘﺭﺺ ‪، Kodak Picture CD‬ﺘﻌﺭﺾ ﺍﻠﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺭ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺮﺓﹰ ﻭﻠﻴﺲ ﻘﺎﺌﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﻘﺎﻃﻊ�‬‫ﺍﻠﺪﻭﺭﺍﻦ‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﻜﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻠﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ►‪) ◄/‬ﻴﺴﺎﺮ ﻤﻴﻦ( ﺘﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺭﺓ ‪ 90‬ﺪﺭﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻗﺎﺮ ﺐ ﺍﻠﺴﺎ ﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﻜﻝ ﻣﺮ ﺓ ﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺮ ‪ ، π‬ﺴﻭ ﻑ ﺘﻨﻌﻛﺲ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺮﺓﺮﺃﺴًﺎﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻠﻌﺮ ﺽ ﺼﻭ ﺭ ﺓ ﻤﻌﻜﻭ ﺴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﻜﻝ ﻣﺮ ﺓ ﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺮ † ‪ ،‬ﺴﻭ ﻑ ﺘﻨﻌﻛﺲ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺮﺓ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺠﺎ ﻨﺐ ﺍﻠﺼﺣﻴﺢ ﻠﻌﺮ ﺽ ﺼﻭ ﺭ ﺓ ﻤﻌﻜﻭ ﺴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.100%, 125%, 150%, 200% :‬‬‫‪Slide Show‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻤﺎ ﻨﻘﻭﻢ ﺒﺎﻠﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺮ )ﺍﻠﺪﺧﻭﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ Jpeg‬ﺴﻮﻒ ﺘﻨﺘﻘﻝ ﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺓ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻭ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻠﺷﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻠﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺭ ﺾ ﺍﻠﺷﺮ ﺍﺌﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺌﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺺ ‪ CD-R‬ﺬﺌﺖ ﻤﻔﺎﺖﺑﺎﻤﺘﺪﺍﺪ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ ﻴﻣﻜﻦ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻠﻠﻔﺎﺖ ﺫﺍﺖ ﺍﻻ ﻤﺗﺩﺍﺩ ‪ jpg”.‬ﻭ‪ “JPG.‬ﻔﻗﻄ�‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺺ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻐﻠﻖ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺗﻐﺭﻖ ﻭﻗﺗًﺎ ﺃﻃﻭﻞ ﻠﺑﺩﺀ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻴﺘﻌﺬﺮ ﺗﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻠﻜﺎﻔﺔ ﺍﻠﻠﻓﺎﺖ ﺍﻠﺴﺠﻠﺔ�‬‫ ﻳﻤﻛﻦ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺺ‪ CD-R‬ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﺷﺘﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻳﻖ ‪ ISO 9660‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Joliet‬ﻔﻗﻄ�‬‫ ﻻﻴﺟﻭﺯ ﺃﻦ ﻴﻜﻭﻦ ﺍﺴﻢ ﻣﻠﻑ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻃﻭﻝﻤﻥ ‪ ٨‬ﺤﺭﻭﻒ ﻭﻴﺟﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺷﺘﻤﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺴﺎﻔﺎﺖ ﻔﺎﺮﻏﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺤﺮﻭﻒ ﺧﺎﺼﺔ )‪.(+=/.‬‬‫ ﻴﻣﻜﻦ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﻘﺮﺺ ﺘﻣﺖ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺗﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺠﻠﺴﺎﺖ ﻣﺘﺗﺎ ﺑﻌﺔ ﻔﻗﻂ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺤﺘﻭﻯ ﻗﺮﺹ‬‫ﺍﻠﺟﻠﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪ ،‬ﻔﻳﻤﻛﻦ ﺗﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺾ ﺤﺗﻰ ﺍﻠﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻠﻔﺎﺮﻍ ﻔﻘﻃ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻛﻦ ﺘﺳﺟﻳﻞ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺺ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻄ ﻭﺍﺤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﻧﺻﺢ ﺑﺎﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ‪.Kodak Picture CD‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺺ ‪ ,Kodak Picture CD‬ﻴﻤﻛﻥ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻞ ﻤﻠﻓﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻔﻗﻂ ﻔﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺭﺺ ‪ : Kodak Picture CD‬ﻳﻤﻛﻥ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﻟﺖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻠﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻔﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺩ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺮ ﺑﺷﻜﻝ ﺗﻠﻗﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺺ ‪ : Konica Picture CD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺕ ﺘﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺮﺓ ‪,‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﻠﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻔﻲ ﻓﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻗﺎﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺺ ‪ : Fuji Picture CD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺕ ﺘﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺮﺓ ‪,‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﻠﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻔﻲ ﻓﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻗﺎﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺺ ‪ : QSS Picture CD‬ﻗﺪﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻃﻴﻊ ﺍﻠﻭ ﺤﺪﺓ ﺘﺷﻳﻞ ﻗﺭﺹ ‪.QSS Picture CD‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻭ ﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻔﻲ ﻗﺮﺺ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻔﻗﻃ ﻴﺯﻴﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻑ ‪ ,‬ﻓﻴﻤﻛﻥ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻧﺴﻳﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻔﻘﻃ�‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻠﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﻭ ﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻔﻲ ﻗﺮﺺ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻔﻗﻃ ﻴﺯﻴﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻑ ‪ ,‬ﻓﻴﻤﻛﻥ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻔﻘﻃ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻤﺟﻠﺪ�‬
‫ﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻜﺎﺭﻭ ﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻛﺎﺭﻮ ﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﻔﻗﻄ ‪(DVD-C450K,C350K‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮ ﺻﯿﻞ أﻃﺮاف ﺧﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻤﺰوج ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز أو ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮ ت‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮوﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻛﺎروﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺻﯿﻞ اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ .MIC‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮ ﺻﻴﻞ اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫‪ / Mic.Volume‬أزرار اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص اﻟﻜﺎروﻛﻲ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲاﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ ﺍﻀﻐﻄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ‪ KARAOKE‬ﻟﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﻤﻠﻒ ‪ ، Mic Volume‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ KARAOKE‬ﻟﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﻤﻠﻒ ‪keycon‬‬‫‪ .٢‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ﻳﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻇﺔ‬
‫ إذاﻛﻨﺖﺗﺴﻤﻊﺻﻮﺗًﺎ ﻣﻌﯿﻨًﺎ )ﺻﺮاخ أو ﻧﺒﺎح( ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﯿﺰﺓ ﻛﺎﺭﻭ ﻛﻲ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮ ن ﺑﻌﯿﺪًا ﻋﻦ اﳌﻜﺒﺮات أو ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن أو ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ى ﺻﻮت ﳌﻜﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮ ص ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻭ ‪ WMA‬و ‪ DTS‬ﻭ ‪ ،LPCM‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰة ﻛﺎروﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻳﺼﺪر ‪ MIC‬ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺧﺮ ج اﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ي ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺫﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺫﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫اﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﻜﺷﺎﻒ ﺍﻵﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺼﻼﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻔﺑﻞ ﻄﻠﺏ ﺍﻠﺻﻳﺎﻨﺔ )ﺍﺴﺘﻜﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻂﺎﺀﻭﺇﺻﻼﺤﻬﺎ( ‪ ,‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻤﺤﻈﻭﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻛﻥ ﺗﺫﻜﺭ ﻜﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﺮﻭﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍﺀﺍﺖ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻤﺎﻤﻳﺔ( ﻠﺩﺓ ﺃﻜﺛﺭﻤﻥ ﻩ ﺜﻭﺍﻥٍ ﺃﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﻢ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺮﺺ ﺑﺎﻠﺩﺍﺧﻞ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ■ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺴﺗﻌﻭﺪ ﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺖ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺖ ﺍﻠﺻﻨﻊ ﻤﺭﺓً ﺃﺨﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻤﺎﻤﻳﺔ( ﻠﺪﺓ ﺃﻜﺛﺮ ﻣﻥ ﻩ ﺜﻭﺍﻥٍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎﺀ ﻋﺩﻢ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﺃﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ‪.‬ﺴﺗﻌﻭﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ■ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺖ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺖ ﺍﻠﺼﻧﻊ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻔﻲ ﺫﻠﻚ ﻜﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﺭﻭﺭ ‪.‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﺟﺄ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﺫﻠﻚ ﺃﻻ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﺍﻠﺿﺭﻭﺮﺓ ﺍﻠﻗﺻﻭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﻭﺍﺼﻓﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻤﺘﻃﺎﺑﺎﺖ ﺍﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﻜﻬﺭ ﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻭﺯﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﻬﻼﻚ ﺍﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﻜﻬﺭ ﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻖ ﺪﺮ ﺠﺔ ﺣﺭ ﺍﺭ ﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺛﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺭﻄﻭ ﺑﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺛﻐﻴﻝ‬
‫ﺨﺮ ﺝ ﺍﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻭ‬
‫ﻤﻜﻮ ﻦ ﺍﻠﻔﻴﺪ ﻴﻭ‬
‫ﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻹ ﺨﺭ ﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺠﺭ ﺝ ﺍﻠﺼﻭ ﺕ‬
‫ﺃ ﻘﺼﯽ ﻤﺴﺗﻭ ﻯ ﻟﻸ ﺠﺭ ﺍﺝ‬
‫* ﺧﺮ ﺝ ﺼﻭ ﺕ ﺮ ﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬ـ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻔﻭ ﻠﺕ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﺮﺪﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺒﺘﺭﺪﺪ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺭ ﺗﺯ‬
‫‪DVD-C450K,C450‬‬
‫‪ ٠١،٥‬ﻜﺨﻡ‬
‫‪DVD-C360,C350K,C350‬‬
‫‪ ٠١،٢‬ﻜﺨﻡ‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪DVD-C450K,C450‬‬
‫)‪ ٤٢ (H‬ﻤﻠﻢ )ﻋﺭﺾ( ‪ ٢٠٧ X‬ﻤﻠﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ( ‪ ٤٣٠ X‬ﻤﻠﻢ )ﺍﺭﺘﻓﺎﻉ(‬
‫‪DVD-C360, C350K, C350‬‬
‫)‪ ٤٢ (H‬ﻤﻠﻢ )ﻋﺭﺾ( ‪ ٢٠٧ X‬ﻤﻠﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ( ‪ ٣٦٠ X‬ﻤﻠﻢ )ﺍﺭﺘﻓﺎﻉ(‬
‫‪ +5°C‬ﺇﻠﻰ ‪+35°C‬‬
‫‪٪١٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻠﻰ ‪٪٧٥‬‬
‫‪) Y : 1.0 Vp-p‬ﺤﻤﻞ‪ ٧٥‬ﺃﻭﻢ(‬
‫‪) Pr : 0.70 Vp-p‬ﺤﻤﻞ‪ ٧٥‬ﺃﻭﻢ(‬
‫‪) Pb : 0.70 Vp-p‬ﺤﻤﻞ‪ ٧٥‬ﺃﻭﻢ(‬
‫‪RCA‬‬
‫‪Vrms ٢‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻫﺭﺘﺯ ﺇﻠﻰ‪ ٢٠‬ﻜﺘﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺘﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺫﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺫﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﺤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‬SAMSUNG ‫ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
.SAMSUNG ‫ ﻓﻴﺠﺮﻯ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬،Samsung ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com/mx
www.samsung.com/us
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com/br
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com.co
www.samsung.com/be (Dutch)
www.samsung.com/be_fr (French)
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com/fr
www.samsung.de
www.samsung.com/hu
www.samsung.com/it
www.samsung.com/lu
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com/es
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com/uk
www.samsung.com/ie
www.samsung.com/at
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com/ch_fr/ (French)
www.samsung.ru
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
www.samsung.ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru
www.samsung.com/lt
www.samsung.com/lv
www.samsung.com/ee
www.samsung.com/au
www.samsung.com/nz
www.samsung.com/cn
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/hk_en/
www.samsung.com/in
www.samsung.com/id
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com/sg
www.samsung.com/th
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com/vn
www.samsung.com/tr
www.samsung.com/za
www.samsung.com/ae
AK68-01924A
Contact Center 
Area
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421, 4004-0000
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
00-1800-5077267
800-7919267
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0-800-100-5303
01-8000112112
Canada
Mexico
U.S.A
Argentine
Brazil
Chile
Nicaragua
Honduras
Costa Rica
Ecuador
El Salvador
Guatemala
Jamaica
Panama
Puerto Rico
Rep. Dominica
Trinidad & Tobago
Venezuela
Colombia
02 201 2418
Belgium
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786)
8-SAMSUNG (7267864)
30-6227 515
01 4863 0000
01805-SAMSUNG (726-7864 € 0,14/Min)
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
02 261 03 710
0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/Min)
3-SAMSUNG (7267864)
0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678), 022-607-93-33
80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
902-1-SAMSUNG (902 172 678)
0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG)
0845 SAMSUNG (7267864)
0818 717 100
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min)
Czech Republic
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Hungary
Italia
Luxemburg
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
Slovakia
Spain
Sweden
U.K
Eire
Austria
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min)
Switzerland
8-800-555-55-55
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
Russia
Kazakhstan
Uzbekistan
Kyrgyzstan
Tadjikistan
8-800-502-0000
Ukraine
810-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-800-77777
8000-7267
800-7267
1300 362 603
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786)
400-810-5858, 010-6475 1880
Belarus
Moldova
Lithuania
Latvia
Estonia
Australia
New Zealand
China
3698-4698
Hong Kong
3030 8282, 1800 110011, 1800 3000 8282
0800-112-8888
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1-800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-7864),
1-800-8-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 02-5805777
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1800-29-3232, 02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
444 77 11
0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864 )
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 8000-4726
India
Indonesia
Japan
Malaysia
Region
North America
Latin America
Europe
CIS
Asia Pacific
Philippines
Singapore
Thailand
Taiwan
Vietnam
Turkey
South Africa
U.A.E
Middle East &
Africa
Download PDF